4. TS410_1610_S4HANA_Certification.pdf

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]

Integrated Business Processes in SAP S/4HANA

.

. PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING

. Course Version: 10 Course Duration: 10 Day(s) Material Number: 50138662





SAP Copyrights and Trademarks ©

2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see http://global12.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.

© Copyright. All rights reserved.

iii



Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Demonstration

Procedure

Warning or Caution

Hint

Related or Additional Information

Facilitated Discussion

iv

User interface control

Example text

Window title

Example text




Contents xi

Course Overview

1

Unit 1:

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

2

Lesson: Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

19

Lesson: Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

23

Unit 2:

24

New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX Lesson: Understanding the New User Experience

39 43

Exercise 1: Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/4HANA Unit 3:

44

SAP S/4HANA Basics Lesson: Explain the Organizational Structures

45

Exercise 2: Display the Organizational Structures

49

Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Master Data

51 55

Exercise 3: Display a Material Master Record Exercise 4: Display a Customer Master Record

59

Unit 4:

Financials Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

60 67

Lesson: Explaining Financial Accounting Lesson: Explaining Management Accounting

69

Lesson: Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO


v



71

Unit 5:

73

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics Lesson: Defining General Ledger (GL) Accounts and Cost Elements

81

Exercise 5: Create a Primary Cost Account

85

Lesson: Defining Cost Centers

89 94

Exercise 6: Create and Display Cost Centers Lesson: Posting a GL Account Document

99

Exercise 7: Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

103

Exercise 8: Display an G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

107

Exercise 9: Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

109

Exercise 10: Display a Financial Statement

113

Lesson: Working with Business Partners and Invoices

119 125

Exercise 11: Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor) Exercise 12: Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

129

Exercise 13: Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

133

Exercise 14: Display Vendors Account

136

Lesson: Working with Asset Accounting

141

Exercise 15: Create an Asset Master Record

145 152

Exercise 16: Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition Lesson: Working with Activity Types

155

Exercise 17: Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

165

Exercise 18: Post an Activity Allocation

169

Lesson: Working with Internal Orders

175

Exercise 19: Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

179

Exercise 20: Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal

183

Order Exercise 21: Settle Orders at Period-End

187 188 189

Unit 6:

Human Capital Management Lesson: Organizational Management in HCM Exercise 22: Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

195 197

vi

Lesson: HCM Master Data Exercise 23: Create an Employee Master Data Record

202

Lesson: Executing a Payroll Run

203

Lesson: Integrating with Success Factors




205

Unit 7:

Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

207

Lesson: Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process

208

Lesson: Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

209 215

Exercise 24: Create a Material Master Record Lesson: Creating a Vendor Master Record

217

Exercise 25: Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

222

Lesson: Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records

223 228

Exercise 26: Create a Purchasing Info Record Lesson: Creating Purchase Requisitions

229

Exercise 27: Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

233 236

Exercise 28: Run an Internal Order Report - Commitments Lesson: Creating Purchase Orders

237

Exercise 29: Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

241

Exercise 30: Run an Internal Order Report

243

Exercise 31: Evaulate Purchase Orders

247

Lesson: Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

249

Exercise 32: Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

253 256

Exercise 33: Transfer Posting for Material Lesson: Processing Vendor Invoices

257

Exercise 34: Post the Vendor Invoice

261

Exercise 35: Query the Supplier Account

265

Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run

267

Exercise 36: Create an Automatic Payment Run

273

Exercise 37: View Vendor Accounts


vii



277

Unit 8:

Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

279

Lesson: Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA

280

Lesson: Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

281

Exercise 38: Change a Material Master Record

285 287

Exercise 39: Change Bill of Material Exercise 40: Change a Work Center

289

Exercise 41: Change the Routing for a Finished Product

292

Lesson: Creating a Product Cost Estimate

293

Exercise 42: Create a Standard Cost Estimate

295

Exercise 43: Update Material Valuation

300

Lesson: Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning

301

Exercise 44: Manage Planned Independent Requirements

306 307

Lesson: Defining the MRP Process Exercise 45: Display the Material Master Record

312

Lesson: Processing MRP

313

Exercise 46: Process an MRP Run

317

Exercise 47: Monitor Material Coverage

321

Lesson: Describing the Manufacturing Business Process

322

Lesson: Creating and Releasing a Production Order

323 327

Exercise 48: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order Exercise 49: Release a Production Order

332

Lesson: Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order

333

Exercise 50: Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

339

Lesson: Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt

341

Exercise 51: Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

345 347

Lesson: Performing Period End Closing Activities Exercise 52: Calculate Variances in a Production Order

349

Exercise 53: Settle a Production Order

351

Exercise 54: Evaluate CO-PA

357

Unit 9:

Warehouse Management - Stock Transfer

358

Lesson: Explaining WM Structures and Usage

359

Lesson: Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)

360

viii

Lesson: Processing a Stock Transfer Order




361

Unit 10:

Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

363

Lesson: Describing the Order to Cash Business Process

364

Lesson: Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution

365

Exercise 55: Check Material Master Record for Sales

368 369

Lesson: Creating a Customer Master Record Exercise 56: Create a Customer Master Data Record

375

Lesson: Creating a Condition Record

377

Exercise 57: Create a Condition Record

380

Lesson: Processing a Sales Order

381

Exercise 58: Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

385

Exercise 59: Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

389

Exercise 60: Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

393 397

Exercise 61: Review the Sales Order Lesson: Processing a Delivery Document

399

Exercise 62: Create a Delivery Document

403

Lesson: Processing a Customer Invoice

405

Exercise 63: Create a Customer Invoice

409

Exercise 64: Run a CO-PA Report

416 417

Lesson: Explaining Integration to SAP Hybris Unit 11:

Project System

419

Lesson: Describing the Process Steps in Project System

420

Lesson: Creating a Project Structure

421 425

Exercise 65: Create a Project Structure Lesson: Planning a Project

427

Exercise 66: Plan Resources in a Project

433

Exercise 67: Plan Dates in a Project

437

Exercise 68: Plan Costs in a Project

443

Lesson: Budgeting in a Project

445

Exercise 69: Create the Budget for a Project

449

Exercise 70: Release a Project

455 459

Exercise 71: Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project Exercise 72: Post Time Confirmation with CATS

463

Lesson: Executing a Project

464

Lesson: Evaluating Projects

465

Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities


ix



467

Unit 12:

SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

469

Lesson: Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM

470

Lesson: Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

471

Exercise 73: Display a Functional Location Structure

477 481

Exercise 74: Create an Equipment Master Record Exercise 75: Display an Asset Master Record

487 489 493

Lesson: Creating Notifications Exercise 76: Create a Notification Lesson: Processing Maintenance Orders

495

Exercise 77: Create a Maintenance Order

499

Exercise 78: Plan a Maintenance Order

505

Exercise 79: Release a Maintenance Order

509 511

Lesson: Executing Maintenance Orders Exercise 80: Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

515 519 521

x

Exercise 81: Technically Complete a Maintenance Order Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities Exercise 82: Perform Period-End Closing Activities




Course Overview TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences: ●

Application Consultant

●

Business Process Architect

●

Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User

●

Enterprise Architect

●

Program/Project Manager


xi



xii




UNIT 1

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

Lesson 1 Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

2

Lesson 2 Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

19

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Outline the motivation for SAP S/4HANA

●

Explain the usage of the Simplification List


1



Unit 1 Lesson 1 Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●


SAP S/4HANA Overview

Figure 1: The Business Landscape is Increasingly Complex and Networked

If you look at the numbers in the figure, The Business Landscape is Increasingly Complex and Networked, it becomes obvious that the world around us is not getting simpler, it’s getting more complex, for the following reasons: ●

Exponential growth of digital information – social, mobile, big data

●

Globalization and spread of business networks

●

Internet of Things (you could also say, the Internet of everything)

The response so far has been the development of more complex business processes, more complex organizations, and more complex software solutions. At the end of 2009, 5% of the world’s population owned smartphones. Four years later, that figure jumped to 22%. Currently, 1.7 billion people are on social networks. Over the next three years, that audience will surpass 2.55 billion. By 2020, 5 billion people will enter the middle class and come online, while 50 billion devices will be connected to the “Internet of Things,”

2



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Outlining the Motivation for SAP S/4HANA

creating a digital network of virtually everything. And cloud computing – a $41 billion business in 2011 – will grow to a $241 billion business in that same time frame. The exponential proliferation of mobile devices, social media, cloud technologies, and the staggering amounts of data that they generate has transformed the way that we live and work. In fact, 61% of companies report that the majority of employees use smart devices for everything from e-mail to project management to content creation. While all of these advancements have improved our lives and provided us with greater opportunities for innovation than ever before, they have also accelerated the rise of an entirely new problem to contend with: unprecedented and crippling complexity. The world may be getting smarter, but it hasn’t gotten any easier.

Figure 2: Advances in Technology

In the last few years, there have been significant advances in technology that application developers can take advantage of in order to build smarter and more powerful applications. Examples include the following: ●

Multi-core processors enabling parallelism of tasks This means more throughput of data and faster processing to give us real-time responses.

●

Big memory This enables us to fit an entire organization’s database in memory, which means that we lose the mechanical spinning disk and the latency it brings.

Advances in the design of the on-board cache means that data can pass between memory and CPU cores rapidly. In the past, even with large memory, this was a bottleneck as the hungry CPUs demanded more data and the journey from memory to CPU was not optimal. We can now easily slot more servers into our landscape to add more processing power or memory in order to scale to any size. SAP rewrote its business application software to fully exploit the new hardware. SAP worked closely with leading hardware partners, who shared the product blueprints of their new CPU architectures, so that SAP knew how to write the best modern software to extract as much power as possible. Cloud computing technology has matured in the last few years and is now a compelling deployment option for our customers who do not want to take on the complexity and cost of


3


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 1: SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management: Overview

the installation and maintenance of IT landscapes. Virtualizing machines means lower costs associated with running enterprise-wide applications. Public cloud services based on subscription models increase access to everyone to the latest solutions, reducing the costs and simplifying everything.

Figure 3: Time to Rebuild the Business Suite for the Digital World

Since the beginning of enterprise computing, SAP have been rebuilding the business applications whenever major technology shifts have occurred. Some key moments in the application development history of SAP are the following: ●

●

●

●

4

1979 – SAP invents ERP. SAP builds standard business software based on mainframe technology. The name, SAP R/2 supports and integrates major business functions in real time and handles multi-country and multi-currency implementations (R means real time, and, although there was an R/1, this is not regarded as the first major release.) 1992 – With the rise of the personal computer, the introduction of client/server architecture means another rewrite of the applications to exploit the power of a layered, three-tier architecture approach, in which processing is split across three layers - client, application, and database. It is the end of the mono-chromatic, text-based, messy green screens and the start of a new graphical interface to improve the end user experience. This is the birth of SAP R/3. 2004 – Now the Web is firmly established as the common business network and customers demand better integration between their business applications and the Web. SAP develops a new integration application platform called SAP NetWeaver in order to enable this. Now all SAP applications run on a common platform, and customers and partners can build and integrate existing applications easily using widely adopted Web standards, such as service-oriented architecture (SOA). Additionally, a little later, a new switch framework is introduced to allow customers to selectively enable only the new functions developed by SAP in order to avoid disrupting their core processes. The SAP R/3 name is now replaced by SAP ERP. ERP is part of a larger family known as SAP Business Suite, which also contains many other line of business (LOB) applications from SAP, such as SAP CRM. 2015 – A new wave of advances in hardware architecture brings massive computing power at decreasing costs. Huge memory and multi-core processors arrive to offer massive




computing power. The underlying design of existing SAP applications does not fully exploit the power of the new hardware. A rewrite of the complete Business Suite is required. The new business suite is called SAP S/4HANA.

Figure 4: Core ERP Processes Unchanged

The main ERP processes are, for example, procure to pay, plan to produce, order to cash or request to service are unchanged. What is changing? The way that we access these processes has changed dramatically. In the past , these processes were executed on desktop or laptop. Today, it is important that these solutions can be used on a mobile device using data stored in Cloud solution. Additionally, new Services and new technologies require new solutions.

Figure 5: Some Facts about SAP S/4HANA

SAP S/4HANA comprises a new code base, and new SAP Fiori UX, and new guided configurations. It is our new generation of the suite.


5



These simplified applications are seamlessly integrated to offer one solution for every business problem. All of these applications offer a modern web-based SAP Fiori User Experience, ready for real cloud consumption. All this together makes these applications a completely new product: with a new database, data management, technology and front-end, offering the following: ●

10x smaller data footprint

●

1800 times faster analytics and reporting

●

ERP, CRM, SRM,SCM, PLM, in one system reintegrated

A major achievement is the ability to reintegrate ERP, CRM, SRM, SCM, PLM co-deployed - to save hardware costs, operational costs and time. This is possible because SAP S/4HANA has a 10x smaller data footprint compared to a best-in-class business suite on traditional database. Another example is less process steps: Processing receivables app in SAP GUI vs. SAP Simple Finance: Number of screen changes 8 --> 2 (4x)

Figure 6: SAP HANA – The Great Simplifier

We should recognize the key enabler of SAP S/4HANA from the software side. It is called SAP HANA, and it is the platform on which SAP S/4HANA is natively built. In 2005, SAP started researching the possibility of developing a new wave of applications built on an in-memory database. When SAP realized that no traditional database vendor had what they needed on the database side, SAP began developing its own in-memory database. SAP worked with leading chip manufacturers to identify to optimal design of a database that could exploit the full power of the new generation of powerful processors. The first release of SAP HANA was in early 2011. It was initially positioned as a standalone data mart solution, where customers could replicate data from any sources in real time to the in-memory database, and build Business Intelligence (BI) reports and applications on top. This meant BI was an early beneficiary of the power of SAP HANA. Next, SAP began developing SAP HANA-based accelerators, which were deployed as side-car engines to run alongside traditional SAP ERP functions that were critical to businesses, yet

6




were performing slowly. In simple terms, SAP HANA became a secondary helper database and stepped in to help out with the heavy processing. Around the same time, SAP developed new, innovative applications that were completely powered by SAP HANA and needed massive processing power, such as Smart Meter Analytics and Oncolyzer. Around 2012, SAP successfully converted its first major application, SAP BW, to run completely on SAP HANA. This was quickly followed up with the conversion of SAP Business Suite. These existing applications are referred to as powered by SAP HANA, or simply on HANA: for example, Suite on HANA (SoH) and BW on HANA. Ensure not to confuse SoH with SAP S/4HANA, as these are not the same. Conversion means the code has been adjusted to work with SAP HANA and also to take advantage of some basic optimizations. In 2015, SAP started from scratch and rewrote the complete SAP Business Suite natively to run only on SAP HANA. Unlike Suite on HANA, SAP S/4HANA is a brand new code-line, which works only on SAP HANA. Unlike Suite on HANA, the applications do not have to work on any other vendors’ database. This means SAP was not restricted by the limitations of these databases, which meant code always had to be built so it worked with many databases. This often meant developing over-complicated data models. SAP was finally able to code freely with no compromises, in order to exploit 100% of the power of SAP HANA.

Figure 7: SAP S/4HANA Suite — Introducing the Next Generation Core and Lines of Business Solutions for the Digital Economy

The next generation core and lines of business solutions includes solutiosn for SAP S/4HANA Finance for SAP S/4HANA HR, SAP S/4HANA Supply Chain & Asset Management, SAP S/ 4HANA Sales, Services, and Marketing, and for SAP S/4HANA Sourcing and Procurement. Thereby solutions from ARIBA, CONCUR successfactors, fieldclass and hybris will be used. SAP Ariba is the world’s business commerce network. SAP Ariba combines industry-leading cloud-based applications with the world's largest Internet-based trading community to help companies discover and collaborate with a global network of partners. Using the SAP Ariba Network, businesses of all sizes can connect to their trading partners anywhere, at any time from any application or device to buy, sell and manage their cash more efficiently and effectively than ever before.


®

7



Concur Travel and Expense Web and mobile solutions for travel and expense management. It includes corporate travel booking, expense report automation, reimbursement, audit, and business intelligence, and corporate card integration. It is offered in multiple editions (Small Business, Standard, Concurforce, Professional, Premium). SAP SuccessFactors is the leader in cloud-based Human Capital Management (HCM) software for talent management, core HR, and HR analytics. SAP Fieldglass provides a cloud-based Vendor Management System (VMS) to manage contingent workforce and services procurement programs SAP Hybris helps businesses around the globe sell more goods, services, and digital content through every touchpoint, channel, and device Evolution to SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

Figure 8: Evolution to SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

The evolution starts on SAP R/3 Rel. 4.7, which was able to run on any database and uses SAP NetWeaver as a basement. ERP2004 was followed by SAP ERP6.0. SAP ERP6.0 EhP7 was the first solution, which runs on SAP HANA, the starting point of SAP Finance. SAP Finance on the other hand was the first step in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management Solution. All of these solutions are executed on an SAP HANA database.

8




SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

Figure 9: SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management component is enhanced by LOB Solutions. In the area of Sourcing and Procurement, SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management is enhanced by capabilities in the Ariba Portfolio. This is the Ariba Business Network for supplier collaboration and Ariba Procurement Content in the area of Requisitions. SAP S/4HANA is not a single product. Customers can start with the basics components and add to them later. SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management is a great place to start. This is known as the “simplified core”. Perhaps it might help to think of SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management as the replacement for SAP ERP. Here, we find support for all core business processes, such as order to cash, procure to pay, and so on. For many customers, this is where their SAP S/4HANA adoption begins. Seamlessly integrated with the core, we find SAP S/4HANA Lines of Business (LoB) solutions. These are options that can be added at any time and provide best-in-class lines of business solutions and connections to SAP Business Networks. In the past, we had multiple add-on applications surrounding a core (for example SAP ERP, SAP CRM, and SAP SRM), but with overlapping models and much redundancy. Now overlaps and redundancy have been completely removed from SAP S/4HANA. SAP S/4HANA is built natively and optimally to run only on the SAP HANA platform. Let’s highlight the most important aspects of SAP S/4HANA and what makes it very different from what we had before. We will then drill down on individual topics in later slides. First of all, SAP S/4HANA is built on SAP HANA, so we inherit all the capabilities of this powerful data management and application platform. This includes advanced text mining, predictive analysis, simulations, and powerful real-time decision support. A brand new user experience is delivered to improve the productivity and satisfaction of business users and brings the interface up to a consumer-grade experience on any devices. SAP S/4HANA can be deployed on premise or in the cloud, or a combination of both, to provide flexible options to customers.


9



The data model has been massively simplified. This means that we lost unnecessary tables and, of course, the data in those tables, to shrink the footprint dramatically and simplify the application design and extensibility. SAP S/4HANA Logistics – Key Innovations

Figure 10: SAP S/4HANA Logistics – Key Innovations

Within SAP S/4HANA the following key innovations have been developed: ●

●

●

●

● ●

●

10

In Material Requirements Planning, fast MRP run and new working model for MRP controllers In Inventory Management, a simplified data model resulting in increased through-put, and flexible analytics at the most granular level In Material Valuation, the elimination of locking, and increased throughput for standard price utilizing Material Ledger In Available To Promise & Backorder processing, a new ATP algorithm based on SAP HANA embedded in mass component check in production In Capacity Planning, PP/DS side by side with SAP S/4HANA In Order Management & Billing, the enabled monitoring of end-to-end order-to-cash process and take action for any exceptions, information on the exceptions to resolve the issues In Procurement, increased efficiency in the Procure-to-Pay processes, new analytical apps and spend KPIs, and Ariba Network Integration for PO Order




Key Aspects of SAP S/4HANA

Figure 11: Key Aspects of SAP S/4HANA

Here we highlight the most important aspects of SAP S/4HANA and describe why it is very different from previous solutions. We then drill down on individual areas later. SAP S/4HANA is built on SAP HANA, so it inherits all the capabilities of this powerful inmemory data management and application platform. This includes advanced text mining, predictive analysis, simulations, and powerful real-time decision support, with access to any type of data in real time. A brand new user experience is delivered to improve the productivity and satisfaction of business users and brings the interface up to a consumer-grade experience, optimized for any device. SAP S/4HANA can be deployed on premise, in the cloud, or a combination of both, to provide flexible consumption options to customers. The data model has been massively simplified. This means that we have lost unnecessary tables, and of course the data in those tables, in order to shrink the footprint dramatically and simplify the application design and extensibility. Bringing OLTP and OLAP Together


11



Figure 12: Bringing OLTP and OLAP Together

For more than 20 years, organizations have been using specialist software, usually with additional hardware, to extract, transform, and load (ETL) data from transaction systems to dedicated reporting systems. Based on the technology available, this has been the optimal way to provide a holistic view of business data with good response times (especially when you add accelerator software or hardware). Online Transaction Processing (OLTP) has been separated from Online Analytical Processing (OLAP). This is due to the database design of OLTP and OLAP. Database models have been either built for OLTP optimization or OLAP optimization, but not both. However, this has also bought with it complexity, redundancy, and latency. It has been common for today’s business figures to be available only tomorrow for analysis, once the data has been extracted and loaded to a reporting system. The database that supports SAP S/4HANA (SAP HANA) can handle both OLTP and OLAP processing from a single data model, so there is no need to move transaction data to a separate system. This means that transaction and analytical applications run off the same tables, and data is available in real time at every level of detail. Data Footprint

Figure 13: Data Footprint

A simplified solution architecture will benefit your IT organization immediately.

12




The IT landscape, processes, and maintenance routines are all positively impacted by a simplified solution architecture. The numbers shown here are from real-world experience of SAP Benchmarking Services, a division of the SAP services and support organization. The advantages offered by a simplified solution architecture include the following: ●

Simplified IT landscape Cut memory and storage resources dramatically and improve reliability

●

71% reduction in maintenance Maintenance is simplified by greatly reducing ETL and re-indexing batch jobs

●

Infinite scale Having an engine that allows the processing and analyzing of massive amounts of any data leads to a situation that only our imaginations limits the boundaries to use the system. All data, both inside and outside the company, structured and unstructured, can be processed and analyzed. Therefore, systems need the performance and scale to operate on a complete new level of data quality and quantity; it must be ensured that any redundant data is removed from the system, any data that does not directly contribute and benefit the business process or the quality of the information provided.

●

Business agility Systems need to be able to support massively increased business agility and need to instantly react on user requests. Processes that hinder system performance and system agility must be avoided. This is the end of batch processing; batch has started with punch cards, punch cards have died, UIs, which were the interfaces of function modules have died and the batch is now dying in these days.

Data Footprint 2

Figure 14: Data Footprint 2

A reduction from 593 GB to 8,4 GB provides much more than simply storage capacity reduction:


13



●

You can run the application on a mobile device.

●

You increase the flow of data through your Business Applications.

●

Response times are shorter.

●

You can see more data on a screen (statistical data directly into a data entry screen).

●

Backup and updates are faster.

●

Restores are faster.

Simplified Applications

Figure 15: Simplified Applications

We have already covered the simplification of applications from the technical side. Now we look at how simplification also applies to the business side, with an example from finance. In traditional SAP ERP finance, financial postings have been supported by two key documents, the Finance (FI) document and the Controlling (CO) document. These documents provide the required views of the finance data from a legal perspective (FI) and also an internal management accounting perspective (CO). There is a lot of overlap between these documents. Application code has had to deal with these two types of postings whenever a business event has occurred that triggered a financial outcome, for example, a material receipt. With SAP S/4HANA Finance, we now have only one document. This is called the Universal Journal Entry. A single financial posting is made to one table, which holds all information that is needed by both legal and management accounting. The application code is simplified and any views of the data that are required are created on the fly by SAP HANA. We do not lose any business meaning, but we lose the underlying complexity of the application.

14




Previous Complexity

Figure 16: Previous Complexity

Another example of application simplification relates to material requirements planning (MRP). Usually, this key business process is complex, with many steps and, as a result, can run for a long time before results are produced. MRP is an iterative process. It involves identifying the components needed to satisfy demand, then checking resource capacity to procure those components, then readjusting the plan. This can take a lot of time, and by the time the processes have completed, the data can already be out of date. For example, you collected the demand data an hour ago and ran MRP to calculate the raw materials, but the demand picture changed while you waited for these results, so information you have is already out of date. Therefore, real-time MRP is impossible, and you are always operating and making decisions on out-of-date results. In a fast-moving business where agility is essential, this is not acceptable.


15



Current Simplicity

Figure 17: Current Simplicity

With SAP S/4HANA, MRP is a real-time process. This is achieved because of the raw power available with SAP HANA, and the dramatically simplified data model and application code that runs faster. MRP is no longer a painful batch process, which means you can run it whenever an individual change occurs in the inventory position right down the BOM component level. This means that MRP becomes live. With SAP S/4HANA, you can now plan right down to a lot size of one. If a customer order is taken, you can immediately determine the effect on all the dependant subcomponents’ requirements, but only for that single order. This means that the inventory department can i begin working on the procurement of the missing items immediately, and do not have to wait until the next MRP run to tell them there are missing subcomponents.

16




Ready-to-Go Integration with Existing Cloud Solutions

Figure 18: Ready-to-Go Integration with Existing Cloud Solutions

SAP S/4HANA can be natively integrated with the existing SAP Cloud solutions, such as Ariba, SAP Concur, SAP Hybris, SAP SuccessFactors, SAP Cloud Analytics, and SAP Cloud for Customer (C4C). Let us consider an example to help illustrate what this might look like. A customer deploys SAP S/4HANA to implement a core procurements process, such as purchase to pay. Employees are now happy that they can place requests for equipment that they need. However, employees would like to be able to read reviews from other purchasers of the same items, just as they do when they are at home using consumer applications, such as Amazon. The employees would also like to be able to ask vendors detailed questions about the items. By integrating SAP S/4HANA with Ariba Network, this is possible. SAP provides best practices and tools to rapidly integrate SAP S/4HANA with all SAP Cloud solutions, including SAP Business Networks.


17



SAP S/4HANA: Deployment Options

Figure 19: SAP S/4HANA: Deployment Options

SAP S/4HANA is both available as on premise edition and as cloud edition. This training focuses on the 1511 SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

18





Unit 1 Lesson 2 Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List



Content of Simplification List

Figure 20: The Simplification List

With every new release of SAP S/4HANA, the simplification list is updated with releasedependent information. It describes the simplification items valid for SAP S/4HANA. This list must be treated as a complete inventory that is mapped against a productive environment to determine the impact when converting to SAP S/4HANA. It is a collection of single simplification items with the focus on what has to be considered through an implementation system conversion project. The following information is provided for each simplification item: ●

Description

●

Business impact and recommendations

●

SAP notes (for related pre-checks or custom code checks)


19



Figure 21: Simplification List As a Basis

To accomplish the transition to SAP S/4HANA, the study of the simplification list is a good starting point and guideline. SAP also provides additional tools to support the transition. Pre-checks are shipped as SAP Notes to customers that want to convert to S/4HANA. Customers can use these pre-checks to find out what mandatory steps they have to carry out before converting to SAP S/4HANA. The pre-check results list the instances that need addressing before attempting the conversion process. Custom code analysis is used to support the customer in detecting custom code that needs to be adapted so that it can be moved to SAP S/4HANA. SAP offers custom code analysis tools (as part of the SAP NetWeaver 7.50). The customer can verify whether their current custom code will be compliant with SAP S/4HANA data structures and scope. SAP S/4HANA Sales Solution Simplification — The Principle of One The principle of one includes the following: ●

SAP Global Trade Service (GTS) replaces ERP SD Foreign Trade (SD-FT).

●

SAP Credit Management replaces ERP FI Credit Management (FI-AR-CR).

●

Settlement Management

●

SAP Revenue Accounting replaces ERP SD Revenue Recognition (SD-BIL-RR).

●

replaces ERP SD Rebates (SD-BIL-RB).

Cloud for Sales and SAP CRM On-Premise are recommended for your field sales team. ERP Sales Support (SD-CAS) is not part of SAP S/4HANA Sales.

Currently, SAP offers there are two software services for international trade transactions: Foreign Trade (FT) and Global Trade Service (GTS). FT is part of the normal SD. GTS is an external service that can be installed on an additional instance. The FT functionality is not available with SAP S/4HANA 1511, because SAP GTS is the successor for the business requirement. The FI-AR-CR Credit Management is not available with SAP S/4HANA 1511. The functional equivalent in SAP S/4HANA is SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR). In SAP S/4HANA, Settlement Management replaces SD Rebate Processing, which means that existing rebate agreements can only be processed up until the end of the validity date of the agreement. They must then be closed by a final settlement. New agreements can only be created based on condition contracts.

20



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explaining the SAP S/4HANA Simplification List

The ERP SD Revenue Recognition is not available within SAP S/4HANA. The newly available SAP Revenue Accounting and Reporting functionality should be used instead. This functionality supports the new revenue accounting standard, as lined out in International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS15) and adapted by local Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAPs). The migration to the new solution is required to comply with IFRS15, even if an upgrade to SAP S/4HANA is not completed. Computer-Aided Selling (SD-CAS) is not available within SAP S/4HANA, because it is not the target architecture. It is recommended to use SAP CRM on-premise (side-by-side with SAP S/4HANA) or SAP Cloud for Customer.

Figure 22: Further Major Simplifications

As shown in the figure, Further Major Simplifications, the following changes are relevant for SAP S/4HANA Sales and Distribution: ●

Business partner approach

●

SD simplified data model

●

Simplifications in SD analytics

●

Billing document output management

LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



21



22




UNIT 2

New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX

Lesson 1 Understanding the New User Experience

24

Exercise 1: Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/4HANA

39

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Understand the new user experience


23



Unit 2 Lesson 1 Understanding the New User Experience



Traditional User Interface

Figure 23: Traditional User Interface

It does not matter how good an application is if the user experience is poor. In the past, user interfaces all suffered from the same problem: They were too complicated. The main reason for this is that interfaces were often designed around the business function, and not around the person. The result was a cluttered screen that tried to provide many features to many different job roles. For example, consider a sales order screen: How many job roles does this screen support? You might assume one: The sales order entry clerk. However, the reality is that the same screen is used by a large number of people who need to either check information or make adjustments to an existing order. Some examples are as follows: ●

24

A quality assurance worker in the delivery department needs to release a blocked item in the order.

●

A finance person needs to adjust tax assignments.

●

A salesperson needs to adjust discounts.

●

A marketing employee needs to apply promotion codes.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Understanding the New User Experience

●

A project manager needs to check that costs have been assigned to the correct project phases.

Each of these people could find themselves using the same screen, but only a very small part of the screen. The screen ensures that they all work hard to navigate to the specific area they need, ignoring the options they do not need. Lots of clicks are required for very little highvalue interaction.

Concepts and Influence Factors

Figure 24: Concepts and Influence Factors

The use of IT and electronic devices is no longer reserved for a group of expert users; it has spread throughout society to all social groups. People need high-performing hardware that can support a variety of software products, with different scope and potential. There is added pressure to supply an easy-to-use solution to the end user. The main drivers of this development are smartphones and tablets, with their easy-to-use and flexible User Interfaces (UIs). The focus of these UIs is no longer on huge functionality but rather a comfortable User Experience (UX), which puts the focus on the consumer. Business software must adapt and transform to turn this trend to its maximum advantage for the roles of an enterprise. In this evolution, the UI plays an important role. With regard to SAP software products, the challenge is to keep a clear view and to understand the overall SAP strategy in the area of UX. Furthermore, it is important to have a clear understanding of the goals and target groups of each UI technology, in order to avoid mistakes and frustrated users. In the beginning, it is helpful to clarify the terminology used. A good place to start is with the terms UI and UX.


25


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 2: New User Experience: SAP Fiori UX

UI versus UX

Figure 25: UI versus UX

The terms UI and UX represent two different ways of thinking. From a software perspective, UI describes the interface between a human being and a device. It aims to maximize the efficiency of the device when used. UX takes on the perspective of the end user, and aims to provide motivation and emotion, not only during use, but also before and after use. UX tries to achieve a sustainable, positive attitude, and to create a motivating experience.

Focus on Function

Figure 26: Focus Shift

Contrary to traditional interface design, the design approach with SAP Fiori is that the focus is now on the job role, rather than the function. SAP Fiori applications are always role-based. There are many applications to choose from, and they are organized in easy-to-use catalogs, supplied by SAP S/4HANA. You simply need to assign the roles to the users.

26




Each SAP Fiori application is built around the user, rather than the function. As a result, the screens are very simple and uncluttered. A key goal of any SAP Fiori application is to ensure that a user can complete a task with as few clicks as possible. In the past, users could find themselves working with many different interfaces, each one with a completely different look and feel, even when they only had one task to complete. With SAP Fiori, users require little training, because the simple screens are intuitive, with only the essential information and options available. Imagine checking a customer inquiry from SAP CRM using the SAP Portal interface, and then moving to SAP GUI to check the stock availability in ERP. Completely different interfaces are used with their own style and features, with different buttons, menus, and tools. With SAP Fiori, users work with just one design. Not all transactions from ERP are converted to SAP Fiori applications, so SAP GUI must still be used in some cases. The cloud edition uses only SAP Fiori applications, and there are no classic SAP GUI screens. SAP GUI is still available with the on-premise edition, and can be used alongside SAP Fiori, but we recommend using SAP Fiori to take full advantage of the features of SAP S/4HANA.

User Types

Figure 27: User Types

Depending on the industry and company, various user types can be found. There is a great variety of different user types available, depending on the structure of the specialized area and the IT department, as well as the degree of digitization. However, in almost every company there are three basic types: ●

Occasional users An occasional user makes use of the system occasionally, and therefore needs simple and easy-to-use applications. In many cases single-step transactions are executed.

●

Experts


27



An expert user (or sometimes key user) is a fully-trained SAP user who knows the processes and the available applications in detail. An expert user very often uses multiple systems and different UIs. ●

Developers A Developer (or programmer) has detailed process and system know-how, and deals with the adaptation and extension of the existing applications. They look after several applications with different UIs.

Deployment Types

Figure 28: Deployment Types

The deployment type defines the license model and operational environment. In the On Premise type, the customer buys software and hardware, and operates the combination themselves. Therefore, the customer is solely responsible for implementation, the update extensions, and adaptation, as well as replacements and new investments. In the Cloud type, the cloud company provides infrastructure (hardware and software) and business software, and rents this combination to the customer. The cloud company is responsible for the operation, updates, extension, and new investments. At SAP, different operational models are available (for example, public cloud, private cloud, and privately managed cloud), with different software and service provisioning. In the Hybrid type, the customer runs certain parts of their business software on their own servers, and uses additional solutions from a cloud provider. This deployment type requires an intense integration between the On Premise parts and the Cloud types.

28




Next Generation of UI

Figure 29: Next Generation of UI

A key theme of SAP S/4HANA is simplification, and this certainly applies to the user experience. We use the term user experience , rather than user interface, because we need to consider the overall experience of the user, rather than just the look of the screen. For example, if you went to a restaurant that was strong on food presentation, but where the service was poor, you would say that the overall experience was not good, and you would not be keen to repeat it. It is important to provide not only a great-looking UI, but also features that help the user become more productive, resulting in a good overall experience. This is what SAP Fiori delivers. SAP Fiori is a completely new user experience, rather than an upgrade to any existing interface, such as SAP GUI, SAP Portal, or SAP Business Client. It works on any device that allows users to have the same experience, regardless of the device they choose to use. They can set up a basic sales order in the office using their desktop, then visit the customer to complete the configuration and agree pricing using a tablet. SAP Fiori provides the same look, feel, and productivity features on all devices. SAP Fiori applications are designed using a methodology called design thinking , which is a user-centric and solution-based approach to software and user interface design.


29



Target: Unified UX Direction for all SAP Software

Figure 30: Target: Unified UX Direction for all SAP Software

The long-term goal of the SAP UX strategy is to offer SAP Fiori (as the unified UI) to all business and all analytic applications on SAP HANA.

Types of Fiori Applications

Figure 31: Types of SAP Fiori Application Details

SAP Fiori applications can be classified into different types. Examples include the following: ●

Transactional These follow an optimal design for fast transaction processing, such as purchase receipt entry.

30




●

Analytical These provide the tools required for analysis, graphs, charts, exploration, data mining, and drill-down.

●

Factsheet These provide a 360 degree view of all key information related to a business subject. For example, enter an employee name and all information about that employee appears, such as working hours, vacation, pay, performance, manager, and awards.

Note: This is a good example of the SAP Fiori approach, which is to use a limited number of consistent interfaces to keep things simple. When a developer creates a new SAP Fiori application, they begin by selecting a template that is based on transactional, analytical, or factsheet, so they have a consistent look and feel.

Figure 32: Types of SAP Fiori Application

Here are the three most common types of SAP Fiori App: ●

●

●

Transactional apps use ABAP to provide the classic approach for functions of a business system. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on any DB. Analytical apps use the analytical capabilities of SAP HANA to provide insights in business data. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on HANA. Fact Sheet apps use the enterprise search capabilities of SAP HANA to provide search results. They are available for S/4HANA and Business Suite on HANA.


31



SAP Fiori Architecture

Figure 33: SAP Fiori Architecture

For the technical audience who would like to know about what goes on under the hood with a SAP Fiori application, the following is a quick view of the underlying SAP Fiori architecture. One of the key technical principles is to de-couple the interface logic from the back-end application logic. This means that, technically, SAP Fiori can be used by any back-end application, as it uses industry-standard methods of connecting the applications to the interface. In this case, the back end is an ABAP-based application (SAP S/4HANA). Front-end components identify the calling device (phone, tablet, and so on), so that you know which native template to use to present the application optimally to the device. The front end also identifies the type of foundation for the application, for example, whether the call comes from Launchpad, an SAP Fiori application, or Personas. (We will discuss Personas later.) For applications that access the back end via OData services, the SAP Gateway server is used. Otherwise, HTTPS is used directly with the back end. The Gateway component can be installed on the AS ABAP back-end server, but for production purposes we do not recommend this. The Gateway should be deployed on its own ABAP server. Otherwise, performance conflicts could arise. The database for the front-end server can be SAP HANA, SAP ASE, or SAP MaxDB. The back-end server database is always SAP HANA. The data can be exposed to the ABAP S/4HANA application directly from SAP HANA tables, but it is more likely to be exposed through CDS views. CDS views provide a business-ready view of the data, ready for consumption, and is a new approach to reusable data entities. The CDS views sit on top of the database tables.

32




Note: For more detailed information on SAP Fiori technology, follow the training courses with the code SAPX__ (SAPUI5) and GW100 (SAP Gateway).

SAP Fiori Application Examples

Figure 34: SAP Fiori Application Example: Monitor Material Coverage

A SAP Fiori application called Monitor Material Coverage supports the user in both getting an overview of stock availability (or material coverage) and directly navigating to the current material’s stock or requirements situation.


33



Figure 35: SAP Fiori Application Example: Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

An SAP Fiori application called Sales Order Fulfillment Issues supports the user in both seeing an overview of the issues in sales orders and navigating directly to the documents, to solve the issues.

Search

Figure 36: Search

SAP HANA Search is available via Launchpad at any time. You can avail of the following functions: ●

34

Highlight every search match in a results list




●

Search the result list across all business objects

●

Specify result list per document type

●

Navigate to related objects, showing an object page of the document

●

Navigate to related transactional applications to start maintaining the business object

With SAP S/4HANA, a global search across all applications, business documents and master data is provided. By providing a search term on the top of the screen, the system starts a google-like search across various entities. The search result list is structured along categories like business documents (for example, purchase orders) or master data (for example, suppliers). The search term is highlighted in yellow. Depending on type of search result, either the related object page is started, or the transactional SAP Fiori application. To facilitate providing correct search results, a preview of data related to the search result is provided.

SAP Fiori Launchpad

Figure 37: SAP Fiori Launchpad

The SAP Fiori Launchpad is a role-based, personalized UI client that enables users to access SAP Fiori applications side by side with established UIs. The Launchpad is based on SAPUI5, and can be used on multiple devices to leverage the responsive design paradigm. It can be deployed on multiple platforms: SAP NetWeaver Application Server (ABAP Stack), SAP Enterprise Portal, and SAP HANA Cloud Platform. The SAP Fiori Launchpad comes with predefined content to streamline implementation processes. The SAP Fiori Launchpad is aligned with the two main UI clients: SAP Enterprise Portal (available) and SAP NetWeaver Business Client (planned). Alignment with the SAP Enterprise Portal is achieved by running the SAP Fiori Launchpad UX within the SAP Enterprise Portal (also known as the SAP Fiori framework page), while also leveraging established portal infrastructure and best practices. Note: Alignment of SAP NetWeaver Business Client for Desktop (NWBC) with SAP Fiori Launchpad design is planned for future releases.


35



The SAP Fiori Launchpad can be visually adapted and customized using the UI Theme Designer. It is designed according to the simple and intuitive SAP Fiori user experience, while supporting established UI technologies (such as Web Dynpro ABAP and SAP GUI for HTML).

Role Concept

Figure 38: Role Concept

The assigned user roles control which applications are available. The applications are available for a user depending on the roles that have been assigned to that user.

SAP S/4HANA Sales Business Roles with SAP Best Practices - Examples

Figure 39: SAP S/4HANA Sales Business Roles with SAP Best Practices - Examples

SAP has created some tailored user roles within the SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA. These roles include the relevant applications to fulfil the main tasks of the respective role, for example: maintain master data, and create documents within a certain process. Examples of SAP S/4HANA sales business roles with SAP best practice include the following:

36

●

Internal Sales Representative

●

Billing clerk

●

Business Partner Master Data Specialist




●

Pricing Specialist

●

Shipping Specialist

●

Sales Manager


37



38




Unit 2 Exercise 1 Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/ 4HANA

Business Example You are new to use SAP S/4HANA and the new UX. You need to know what kind of applications (SAP Fiori Apps) are available and how you can add them to your Launchpad. To do this, you must be able to find the application in the catalog and add the application to the Launchpad. First you want to see whether an application is available, therefore you check the SAP Fiori Apps Library. Once you know that the application is available, you would like to include the application in your Launchpad Find the Manage G/L Account Master Data Tile in the Catalog 1. You want to know whether the Manage G/L Account Master Data application is available and included in your catalog assigned. Therefore, you use the SAP Fiori Apps Library to identify the catalog where the application is available. What is the name of the Assigned Business Catalog?

2. Check whether that application is included in your Training for TS410 (ZTRAINING_TS410) catalog as well. In the Gateway system (T4N), open the catalog that you are assigned. Check the original business catalog identified and the corresponding Tile. With a used function, you can see whether the tile is assigned to your catalog.

Where

Add the tile Manage G/L Account Master Data to your Launchpad 1. From the Easy Access Menu in the Gateway System, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad and include the Manage G/L Account Master Data applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


39



Unit 2 Solution 1 Adjust the SAP Fiori Launchpad in SAP S/ 4HANA

Business Example You are new to use SAP S/4HANA and the new UX. You need to know what kind of applications (SAP Fiori Apps) are available and how you can add them to your Launchpad. To do this, you must be able to find the application in the catalog and add the application to the Launchpad. First you want to see whether an application is available, therefore you check the SAP Fiori Apps Library. Once you know that the application is available, you would like to include the application in your Launchpad Find the Manage G/L Account Master Data Tile in the Catalog 1. You want to know whether the Manage G/L Account Master Data application is available and included in your catalog assigned. Therefore, you use the SAP Fiori Apps Library to identify the catalog where the application is available. a) Open an internet browser and go to the Web page https:// fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/# b) In Categories , choose Apps . c) To search for the Manage G/L Account Master Data application, in the Name field, enter Manage G/L Account Master Data.

Search by App

d) Choose the second entry. e) Click the Implementation

information.

What is the name of the Assigned Business Catalog? The name of the catalog is:

SAP_TC_FIN_ACC_COMMON

2. Check whether that application is included in your Training for TS410 (ZTRAINING_TS410) catalog as well. In the Gateway system (T4N), open the catalog that you are assigned. Check the original business catalog identified and the corresponding Tile. With a used function, you can see whether the tile is assigned to your catalog. a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu of the Gateway System, open the catalog and double-click the entry Training for TS410 .

Where

Training for TS410

b) To search for the catalog identified in Step 1, in the Search for Catalog name of the catalog, SAP_TC_FIN_ACC_COMMON.

field, enter the

c) When you find the catalog, look for the tiles included and see whether the Manage G/L account Master Data tile is available. Click the first icon tiles on the header and search

40




for the tile Manage G/L account Master Data the catalog search.

. When you have found the tile, go back to

d) To check if this tile is included in the ZTRAINING_TS410 training catalog, in the Search for Catalog field, enter ZTRAINING_TS410. Click the first icon tiles on the header and search for the Manage G/L account Master Data tile. e) Leave the maintenance of the catalog. Add the tile Manage G/L Account Master Data to your Launchpad 1. From the Easy Access Menu in the Gateway System, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad and include the Manage G/L Account Master Data applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. a) Open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) Go to Group for TS410 and include the c) In the Launchpad, scroll down to icon.

Manage G/L Account Master Data

Group TS410 and choose the

d) To add a new tile, scroll down to the end of group e) In the All catalogs field, select the

application.

Personalize Homepage

TS410 and choose the + entry.

Training for TS410 catalog.

f) Search for the Manage G/L Account Master Data and click Add tile to group TS410 .

tile Manage G/L account Master Data

g) Go Back and exit Action mode . The new tile should be available now in the Group as the last tile.


41




42





UNIT 3

SAP S/4HANA Basics

Lesson 1 Explain the Organizational Structures

44

Exercise 2: Display the Organizational Structures

45

Lesson 2 Understanding the Concept of Master Data

49

Exercise 3: Display a Material Master Record

51

Exercise 4: Display a Customer Master Record

55

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain the organizational structures

●

Understand the concept of master data


43



Unit 3 Lesson 1 Explain the Organizational Structures



Organizational Structures

44




Unit 3 Exercise 2 Display the Organizational Structures

Business Example You want to gain an overview about the enterprise structures in Sales and Distribution, Logistics, and Finance. Therefore, you need to log on to the back-end system and check configuration. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Log on to the back-end system with your user, navigate to the Definition of Enterprise Structure. 2. What is the address of company code 1010? Address:_________________________________ 3. What is the valuation level? Valuation Level:_________________________________ 4. What is the key for Plant 1 DE? Plant:_________________________________ 5. What is the first key for the Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE? Sales organization: _________________________________ 6. Which plants are assigned to company code 1010? Plants: _________________________________ 7. Which sales organization is assigned to company code 1010? Sales Organization: _________________________________


45



Unit 3 Solution 2 Display the Organizational Structures

Business Example You want to gain an overview about the enterprise structures in Sales and Distribution, Logistics, and Finance. Therefore, you need to log on to the back-end system and check configuration. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Log on to the back-end system with your user, navigate to the Definition of Enterprise Structure. a) Log on to the back-end system with your user. b) On the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project . Alternatively, use transaction code SPRO. c) On the Customizing Execute Project (F5).

initial screen, choose the

d) Open the entry

→ Definition .

Enterprise structure

SAP Reference IMG icon

You see the Definition of the enterprise Structures in various areas. 2. What is the address of company code 1010? Address:_________________________________ a) In the Financial accounting Code .

menu area, choose

b) Choose Edit Company Code Data c) Double-click 1010 and choose the

Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company

. Address icon.

The address is Dietmar Hopp Allee 16, 69190 Walldorf. d) Go back to Display IMG . 3. What is the valuation level? Valuation Level:_________________________________ a) In the Logistics General menu area, choose

Define valuation level .

The Valuation area is plant. b) Go back to Display IMG . 4. What is the key for Plant 1 DE? Plant:_________________________________ a) In the Logistics General menu area, choose

46

Define, copy, delete, check plant

.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explain the Organizational Structures

b) Choose Define Plant. The key for Plant 1 DE is 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 5. What is the first key for the Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE? Sales organization: _________________________________ a) In the Sales and Distribution Organization .

menu area, choose

b) Choose Define Sales Organization

Define, copy, delete, Sales

.

The first key for Sales Organization Dom. Sales Org DE is 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 6. Which plants are assigned to company code 1010? Plants: _________________________________ a) In the Assignments menu area, choose b) Choose Assign plant to company code

Logistics General. . .

The plants 1010 and 1020 are assigned to company code 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG . 7. Which sales organization is assigned to company code 1010? Sales Organization: _________________________________ a) In the Assignments menu area, choose

Sales and Distribution

b) Choose Assign Sales Organization to company code

.

.

The Sales Organization 1010 is assigned to company code 1010. c) Go back to Display IMG .


47


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 3: SAP S/4HANA Basics


48





Unit 3 Lesson 2 Understanding the Concept of Master Data



Master Data in SAP S/4HANA


49



50




Unit 3 Exercise 3 Display a Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. The material master for the bicycle is available. The number to be used is TF1##. You will use an SAP Fiori app for this task. Therefore, you need to log on to the Gateway Server and start the SAP FioriI Launchpad. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle T-F1## to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling Data and the Accounting Data. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010

Distribution Channel

10

2. What is the material group and the gross weight of the material? Material Group: ______________________________________________________________ Gross Weight: _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is the delivery plant for this material? Delivery Plant: ______________________________________________________________ 4. What is the transportation group for this material? Transportation Group :_________________________________________________________ 5. Who is the production Supervisor for this material? Production Supervisor:_________________________________________________________ 6. Which is the valuation class for this material? Valuation Class :_________________________________________________________ 7. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


51



Unit 3 Solution 3 Display a Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. The material master for the bicycle is available. The number to be used is TF1##. You will use an SAP Fiori app for this task. Therefore, you need to log on to the Gateway Server and start the SAP FioriI Launchpad. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle T-F1## to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling Data and the Accounting Data. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of Enter.

Display Material tile.

Display Material , in the Material field, enter T-F1##, and press

c) In the dialog box, select views choose the following views: ●

Basic Data 1

●

Sales: Sales Org Data 1

●

Sales: General / Plant Data

●

Work Scheduling

●

Accounting 1

d) Press Enter. e) In the Window Organizational Levels

52

dialog box, enter the following data:



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Master Data

Field

Value

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

f) Press Enter. 2. What is the material group and the gross weight of the material? a) Look at Basic Data 1 . The material group is

L004 and the gross weight is

6,850 kg .

Material Group: ______________________________________________________________ Gross Weight: _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is the delivery plant for this material? a) Look at Sales : Sales Organization 1 The delivery plant is

.

1010 .

Delivery Plant: ______________________________________________________________ 4. What is the transportation group for this material? a) Look at Sales : General / Plant The transportation group is

. 0001 – on pallets .

Transportation Group :_________________________________________________________ 5. Who is the production Supervisor for this material? a) Look at Work Scheduling view. The production supervisor is

YB1.

Production Supervisor:_________________________________________________________ 6. Which is the valuation class for this material? a) Look at Accounting view 1 . The valuation class is

7920 .

Valuation Class :_________________________________________________________ 7. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


53



54




Unit 3 Exercise 4 Display a Customer Master Record

Business Example You want to see how the customer master record is structure in the system. You want to search for particular information in an existing customer master record. Because SAP S/ 4HANA uses the business partner, you need to see how the master record looks now. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. You want to see what the new customer – business partner looks like in the system. Therefore, check an existing master record, T-OVW1, and search for particular information. Use the following information: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-OVW1

Sales Area

1010 / 10 /00

Company Code

1010

2. For which partner roles is the business partner maintained? The business partner is maintained for the following partner roles: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 3. Which reconciliation account is maintained for the business partner? Reconciliation Account: _______________________________________________________ 4. Which shipping condition is maintained for the business partner? Shipping Conditions: _______________________________________________________ 5. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


55



Unit 3 Solution 4 Display a Customer Master Record

Business Example You want to see how the customer master record is structure in the system. You want to search for particular information in an existing customer master record. Because SAP S/ 4HANA uses the business partner, you need to see how the master record looks now. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. You want to see what the new customer – business partner looks like in the system. Therefore, check an existing master record, T-OVW1, and search for particular information. Use the following information: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-OVW1

Sales Area

1010 / 10 /00

Company Code

1010

a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Maintain Business Partner

b) On the Initial screen of Maintain Business Partner T-OVW1 and press Enter.

tile.

, in the Business Partner

field, enter

2. For which partner roles is the business partner maintained? a) In the Display in BP role field, choose the

Role Detail icon.

The business partner is maintained for the roles Customer .

FLCU01 Customer and FLCU00 FI

The business partner is maintained for the following partner roles: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 3. Which reconciliation account is maintained for the business partner? a) Choose the partner role

FI Customer partner role.

b) Choose the Company Code icon. In the Customer: Account Management domestic reconciliation account.

you find the 12100000 – Trade receivables

Reconciliation Account: _______________________________________________________ 4. Which shipping condition is maintained for the business partner?

56



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Understanding the Concept of Master Data

a) Switch to the Partner role Customer. b) Choose the Sales and Distribution

icon. Leave the Application.

On the Shipping tab you find the shipping conditions

01 – Standard .

Shipping Conditions: _______________________________________________________ 5. Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.


57




58





UNIT 4

Financials Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

Lesson 1 Explaining Financial Accounting

60

Lesson 2 Explaining Management Accounting

67

Lesson 3 Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO

69

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain Financial Accounting

●

Explain Management accounting

●

Explain the integration between FI and CO


59



Unit 4 Lesson 1 Explaining Financial Accounting



Financial Accounting Overview

Figure 40: Financial Supply Chain

The central task of General Ledger Accounting is to provide a comprehensive picture of external accounting and financial records. The General Ledger (G/L) serves as a complete record of all business transactions. In addition to the G/L, you can use subledgers for customers, suppliers and so on =. Every posting that is made in the subledgers generates a corresponding posting to the assigned G/L accounts. This ensures that the subledgers are always reconciled with the G/L. The important tasks of FI are the recording of monetary and value flows, and inventory evaluation.

60



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Explaining Financial Accounting

The G/L contains the records of all accounting-relevant business transactions on to G/L accounts from a business point of view. Every G/L is structured according to a chart of accounts. The chart of accounts contains the definitions of all G/L accounts. These definitions include the account number, the G/L account designation, and the categorization of the G/L account as an income statement or a balance sheet account. The G/L often contains only collective postings, a collection of all AR/AP. In such cases, the posting data represented in subledgers pass on their data in compressed form to the G/L. Reconciliation accounts connect the subledgers to the G/L in real time. This means that as soon as a posting is made to a subledger, the posting to the respective reconciliation account in the G/L takes place. Accounts payable (AP) records all business transactions relating to suppliers. It takes much of its data from the procure-to-pay business process. Accounts receivable (AR) records transactions and manages accounting data of all customers. It takes much of its data from the order-to-cash business process. Asset Accounting (AA) deals with both current assets and non-current assets (fixed assets). Bank Ledger (FI-BL) supports the booking of cash flows. Stakeholders of Financials

Figure 41: Stakeholders of Financials

Financials can be subdivided in two major parts: Financial Accounting and Management Accounting. Financial Accounting has the task to meet legal requirements. The main tasks are as follows: ●

Post all financial transactions, revenues, and expenses.

●

Keep them unchanged in the system for reporting purposes.

●

Allow the setting up of a profit&loss statement and a balance sheet to fulfill the legal requirements of a country or of a financial reporting standard.

Therefore, the financial accounting is subject to legal requirements of a country, and, in addition, to requirements of certain financial reporting standards, such as US GAAP, IFRS,


61


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 4: Financials Accounting and Management Accounting: Overview

HGB. The stakeholders of such financial reportings are outside the companies, for example, suppliers, banks, tax government, and so on. Management Accounting is an internal tool for controllers and the Management reporting. The main tasks are as follows: ● ●

●

●

Reflect cost and revenues. Analyze cost variances and inefficiencies in the company and in production processes or service processes. Provide results for individual cost objects, such as cost centers, cost objects, and market segments. Provide data for cost center managers, project managers, and other employees to fulfill their tasks.

Because controlling is internal, you may use different values than used in FI. Additional cost (imputed costs) can be used in addition, some cost (neutral cost) can be excluded, different prices (transfer prices) can be used to valuate cost of purchased goods or cost of goods manufactured different. The stakeholders of such management reportings are only inside the companies, for example, cost center managers, project mangers, sales representatives, and so on. General Ledger and Subledger

Figure 42: General Ledger and Subledger

The G/L is managed at the company code level and used to compile the balance sheet and the profit and loss (P&L) statement. The material goods of a company are listed in the balance sheet, and are divided into assets and liabilities.

62




The business transactions that are entered in the subledgers, materials management, and the Treasury flow into the balance sheet in real time. The component, Treasury (TR), focuses on functions, such as payment means, treasury management (including financial means, foreign exchange, derivatives, and bonds), loans, and market risk management. Balance Sheet and P&L Statement

Figure 43: Balance Sheet and P&L Statement

The aim of recording business transactions is to create a balance sheet and P&L statement report. This report must meet specific national requirements or requirements of used financial reporting standards. You can set up different balance sheet and P&L structures (financial statement versions) to meet reporting requirements of your country or your used financial reporting standards. These structures define which accounts should appear in which balance sheet items.


63



Parallel Financial Reporting

Figure 44: Parallel G/L Ledger

General Ledger Accounting has one leading ledger in each client. However, other ledgers can also exist within the G/L, for example, to provide different ledgers for different accounting reporting standards. In G/L Accounting, one ledger has the role of a leading ledger. However, as in older systems, you can still deal with different reporting standards by using additional (parallel) accounts. Financial Accounting Versus Management Accounting

Figure 45: Financial Accounting Versus Management Accounting

FI is intended for legal reporting. It can be used to draw up a balance sheet and an income statement at the level of accounting entities. The purpose of Management Accounting is to collect revenue and expenses by areas of responsibility to be used for internal management reporting purposes.

64




The level at which FI is needed is determined by law. Legal reporting is different for each country. Management Accounting analyzes costs and revenues at high levels across country boundaries. For example, it can analyze costs for all production departments worldwide. Costs and revenues from FI are used in Management Accounting. In Management Accounting, financial data can be allocated across several (FI) boundaries. The results in Management Accounting can be compared with the result in FI (reconciliation). Management Accounting provides Controlling (CO) objects, which can represent areas of responsibilities that incur costs, revenues, or both, which allow an organization to track both costs and revenues internally. In SAP S/4HANA, Financial Accounting and Management Accounting use common line items for actual data, stored in a Universal Journal . The technical name of the table is ACDOCA. The common line items provide the following: ●

A single source of truth for all accounting components. Reconciliation is a topic of the past bringing large cost and time savings.

●

A simple but holistic data model. SAP HANA can be leveraged in the best possible manner bringing unprecedented insight (in both speed and content!).

●

The universal journal combines and harmonizes the good qualities of all accounting components. The simplification of the application is a required step and a great foundation for further enhancements.

●

Non-disruptive innovation and simplification. SAP strives to provide a true next generation application with the least possible disruption, safeguarding customer investments and processes.

SAP S/4HANA Finance - Simplified Data Model

Figure 46: SAP S/4HANA Finance - Simplified Data Model


65



The new Architecture implements a new data model to SAP S/4HANA Finance, which implies benefits, as follows: ●

●

● ●

One line item table with full detail for all components. Data stored only once, so no reconciliation needed by architecture. Fast multi-dimensional reporting on the Universal Journal possible without replicating data to BI. If BI is in place, one single BI extractor is needed. Reduction of memory footprint through elimination of redundancy. Technical preparation done to enhance important structural capabilities of the Financials solution (for example, multi-GAAP, additional currencies)

Non-Disruptiveness Usage of SAP S/4HANA

Figure 47: Non-Disruptiveness Usage of SAP S/4HANA

If you migrate from an ERP System to SAP S/4HANA, despite the new data model many, old programs will still run. Therefore, SAP provides compatibility views, as follows: ● ●

Read access from custom ABAP programs or reports to prior tables will work as before Read access is automatically re-directed to the universal journal as the new single source of truth


66





Unit 4 Lesson 2 Explaining Management Accounting



Management Accounting Components

Figure 48: Different Focus of Financial Accounting (Fl) and Management Accounting (CO)

CO contains all of the functions necessary for controlling cost and revenue effectively. It covers all aspects of management controlling and includes many tools for compiling information for company management. Financial reports that are used for external reporting purposes, such as balance sheets and profit and loss (P&L) statements, are created in Fl. Similar to the various legal requirements set by relevant financial authorities, these external reporting requirements are prescribed through general accounting standards, such as generally accepted accounting principles in the US (US GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS).


67



Components of CO

Figure 49: Components of Management Accounting

CO consists of several components, as shown in the figure. Similarly, costs from Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) and Product Cost Controlling (COPC) can flow into Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) where, together with revenue data, the system can use these costs to calculate operating results, making it possible to establish how profitable the various areas are. Other SAP ERP applications can post costs or revenues to CO. Postings to an expense account in Fl, for example, can cause cost postings in CO-OM. In the same way, FI can post revenues directly to CO-PA. Cost flows also occur between Fl and CO-PC, where the system enters raw material costs that are incurred in the production process. In addition, there is a flow back into Fl if the system activates the production costs as a finished product or work in process (WIP). Other SAP ERP components, such as Human Capital Management (HCM) and Logistics (materials management, Sales and Distribution, and production planning), are also integrated with CO. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

68





Unit 4 Lesson 3 Outlining the Integration Between FI and CO



Explaining the Integration between FI and CO

Figure 50: Assignment of Company Codes to Controlling Area

By assigning more than one company code to a CO area, you can perform cost accounting for all company codes. You can allocate values in Management Accounting that affect more than one company code. In cross-company-code cost accounting, a CO area and its company codes can have different currencies. The currency of a CO area can be same as that of a company code. You can use the following currencies in Management Accounting: ●

CO area currency


69



●

Company code currency or object currency

●

Transaction currency (used for posting a document to Management Accounting)

By default, cross-company-code cost accounting displays the company code currency as the object currency. You cannot change this default value. If you have assigned only one company code to a CO area, you can also assign the object currency for each CO object, such as a cost center, as required. You can assign more than one company code to a CO area. This assignment enables controlling across company codes. A CO area and its company codes must use the same operating chart of accounts and the same fiscal year variant. However, you can link these accounts to country-specific accounts by using an alternative account number that is stored in the master data record for accounts. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

70





UNIT 5

Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics

Lesson 1 Defining General Ledger (GL) Accounts and Cost Elements

73

Exercise 5: Create a Primary Cost Account

81

Lesson 2 Defining Cost Centers

85

Exercise 6: Create and Display Cost Centers

89

Lesson 3 Posting a GL Account Document

94

Exercise 7: Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

99

Exercise 8: Display an G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items Exercise 9: Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

103 107

Exercise 10: Display a Financial Statement

109

Lesson 4 Working with Business Partners and Invoices

113

Exercise 11: Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

119

Exercise 12: Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

125

Exercise 13: Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

129

Exercise 14: Display Vendors Account

133

Lesson 5 Working with Asset Accounting

136

Exercise 15: Create an Asset Master Record

141

Exercise 16: Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

145

Lesson 6 Working with Activity Types

152

Exercise 17: Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

155

Exercise 18: Post an Activity Allocation

165

Lesson 7 Working with Internal Orders

169

Exercise 19: Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order


175

71


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 5: Financial Accounting and Management Accounting: Basics

Exercise 20: Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

179

Exercise 21: Settle Orders at Period-End

183

UNIT OBJECTIVES

72

●

Define a GL account

●

Create a cost center

●

Post to a GL account

●

Run a financial statement and query an account

●

Create a vendor master record

●

Post a vendor invoice in FI

●

Create an asset master record

●

Plan rates for cost center and activity type

●

Post an activity allocation

●

Create an internal order




Unit 5 Lesson 1 Defining General Ledger (GL) Accounts and Cost Elements


Define a GL account

Chart of Account

Figure 51: Charts of Accounts

Each G/L is set up according to a chart of accounts. The chart of accounts contains the definitions of all G/L accounts. The definitions consist of the account number, the account name, and the type of G/L account (profit and loss (P&L) account or a balance sheet account).


73



Assignment of Company Codes to Chart of Accounts

Figure 52: Assignment of Company Codes to Chart of Accounts

A chart of accounts can be used by multiple company codes so that the general ledgers of these company codes have an identical structure.

General Ledger Account and Cost Element

Figure 53: Maintenance of a G/L Account in Different Company Codes

The two segments of the G/L master record are as follows:

74



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining General Ledger (GL) Accounts and Cost Elements

●

Chart of accounts segment The chart of accounts segment contains a description of the account, an indication as to whether the account is a balance sheet account or a P&L account, the account group that controls the company code segment fields, and the consolidation account number.

●

Company code segment The company code segment contains values specific to how the company code will manage that account.

The following controls are found in the company code segment: ●

Account control

●

Account management

●

Bank or financial details

●

Joint ventures

●

Interest calculation

●

Document control

Expenditures and Cost

Figure 54: Expenditures and Cost

In the economical theory, there are two approaches for values: In the first approach, the values in Financial Accounting and Management Accounting are the same. Controlling provides additional reporting opportunities by separating the FI documents along additional characteristics, such as segments, profit centers, projects, stored in a “coding block”. The results may be P&L statements and balance sheets per segment, per profit center or per project. In the second approach (most used in central Europe), Management Accounting is based on cost and revenues. Costs are only those expenditures, which are as follows: ●

Related to the business of the company

●

Exactly assigned to periods (source specific)


75



●

Valuated For example, a gift to a welfare organization is an expenditure, but not a cost, because it is not the “business of the company” to make gifts.

Expenditures, which do not meet the definition of costs, are only reflected in Financials, and not in Management Accounting. They are called “neutral expenditures”. In addition you may want to take additional costs into account, which are not reflected in FI, for example, because no financial document exists. Examples could include the following: ●

●

●

If you run your company in own offices and buildings, you do not pay rents. But of course they are production factors, which have to be reflected in the costs of the products. So you add the missing rents by additional (imputed) costs in Management Accounting. They are not part of Financial Accounting, because they are not based on a legal document like invoices. If you did invest a huge amount of money in your company you cannot invest your money in the capital market e.g. to earn interests. So the “not realized interests” are the costs (opportunity costs) for your invested money and you may want to add it to CO by using “additional cost” If you have assets in your company, you post depreciations in Financial Accounting. How you calculate depreciations is given by laws of countries and Financial Accounting Standards and are subjected to changes of law at any time. So depreciation in US GAAP may be calculated different than in IFRS or HGB and all of them may not reflect the real decline of value of an asset. So the idea could be to install a separate depreciation calculation for CO. If now the “costing based” depreciation is higher than the “financial based depreciation”, the differences are “additional cost”. On the other hand, the difference would be “neutral expenditure”. (In SAP the different depreciations are reflected by different “valuation areas”. You will read more about this in the lesson about asset accounting later).

In SAP we give the opportunity to realize each of the theories. In SAP S/4HANA revenues, expenditures and cost are represented by financial accounts and separated by the account type of the accounts. Based on the account type, the accounts used in CO are also called “cost elements”.

76




Financial Account and Cost Element

Figure 55: Financial Account and Cost Element

In the new data model , only one master record is needed: the account. A new field is added (GLACCOUNT_TYPE) to differ between the different G/L account types. Note that the account type is assigned on controlling area level. We have P&L accounts for non-operating expenses and revenues, for example, those parts of the P&L that were never associated with a cost center, order, or CO-PA characteristics in the past. We have P&L accounts for the primary cost elements; these are the cost elements used for salary expenses in Cost Center Accounting, material expenses in Order and Project Accounting and revenues and sales deductions in account-based CO-PA. The completely new approach is that we have P&L accounts for the secondary cost element; these are all cost elements used to post allocations in Management Accounting.


77



Account Groups

Figure 56: Account Groups

Account groups classify G/L accounts into user-defined segments and also determine the number range of the accounts that will fall into these user-defined segments. You determine the field status of the company code segment of the master record when you create, change, or display the company code segment. The field status options are Suppress, Required, Display, and Optional. Reconciliation Accounts

Figure 57: Reconciliation Accounts

78




A reconciliation account ensures real-time integration of a subledger account with the G/L. The reconciliation between subledger and G/L is always guaranteed because the G/L reconciliation account is not enabled for direct posting. In the G/L, postings are limited to reconciliation account types only. Management Accounting Integrated into the Company Business

Figure 58: Management Accounting Integrated into the Company Business

Data that the system creates in other SAP ERP applications can have a direct influence on CO. For example, if you purchase a non-stock item, the system posts an expense to the general ledger (G/L). The system also posts this expense as costs to the cost center for which the item was purchased. This cost center can then pass these costs as overhead to a production cost center. FI, in the SAP ERP application, is a primary source of data for CO. In fact, most expense postings in the G/L result in a cost posting in CO. These expense postings to the G/L can be journal postings, vendor invoices, or depreciation postings from Asset Management. Sales order management is a primary source for revenue postings from billing documents to revenue postings in CO-PA and EC-PCA. Human Capital Management (HCM) can generate cost postings in CO. HCM gives you the opportunity to allocate labor costs to various controlling objects. In addition, you can transfer and use planned personnel costs for planning in CO. In materials management (MM), a goods issue transaction can create a cost posting in CO to the specified cost object. The system creates product cost estimates in CO that can update price fields in material master records. Finally, purchase orders in MM can generate commitment postings within CO. The manufacturing area of Logistics also works closely with CO. Bills of material (BOMs) and routings can be used in CO-PC.


79



Within the Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) area, you can post costs to cost centers, internal orders, and processes from other SAP ERP applications (external costs). Cost centers can then allocate these costs to other cost centers, internal orders, and processes in Activity-Based Costing (ABC). ABC, in turn, can pass costs to cost centers and internal orders. Internal orders can settle costs to cost centers, processes in ABC, and other internal orders. Central cost flows can exist between CO-OM and Product Cost Controlling (CO-PC). Cost objects, such as production orders, can receive direct cost postings from FI, costs from cost centers, costs settled from internal orders, and costs allocated from ABC processes. The components of profitability accounting are also tightly integrated with CO-OM and COPC. In addition to direct postings from FI, Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) can receive cost assessments from cost centers and ABC processes, settlements of costs from internal orders, and settlements of production variances from cost objects. If you assign all cost objects to profit centers, all costs posted on these cost objects are automatically assigned to their profit centers.

80




Unit 5 Exercise 5 Create a Primary Cost Account

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Your company (company code

1010 ) needs a new G/L primary cost accounts.

1. Create G/L account in Chart of Accounts. Create the primary Cost account 650030## with description vehicle cost ## in chart of accounts YCOA. Choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad and create the new G/L account with the following values: Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:

P Primary Costs or Revenue

General Tab G/L Account Long Text:

vehicle cost ## gasoline

Account Group

ERG. Income statement accounts

Group Account Number:

65003000 (Vehicle Costs)

2. Before postings can be made to G/L account 650030## in company code 1010, you need to define the company code-specific settings with the following values: Field Name

Value

Control Data Tab: Account Currency:

EUR

Tax Category

V1 which means 19%

Posting without tax allowed

mark

Cost Element Category

1 (Primary costs/cost-reducing revenues)

Create/Bank/Interest Tab: Field Status Group:


YB04

81



Unit 5 Solution 5 Create a Primary Cost Account

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Your company (company code

1010 ) needs a new G/L primary cost accounts.

1. Create G/L account in Chart of Accounts. Create the primary Cost account 650030## with description vehicle cost ## in chart of accounts YCOA. Choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad and create the new G/L account with the following values: Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:


General Tab G/L Account Long Text:


Account Group

ERG. Income statement accounts



a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the Manage G/L Account Master Data Master Data group of the Launchpad. You can search for the tile by entering G/L in the search box on top of the screen. b) Choose the New button on the c) Enter the following values On the

Search: G/L Accounts

tile in the manage

screen.

New Account screen, enter the following values:

Field Name

Value

G/L Account:

650030##

Description:

vehicle cost ##

Chart of Accounts:

YCOA

G/L Account Type:


d) Choose the OK button. e) Enter the following values on the

82

General screen:




Field Name

Value

G/L Account Long Text:


Account type


Account Group

ERG.



f) Choose the Save icon. You have created a G/L account on chart of account level. g) Remain on this screen for the next task. 2. Before postings can be made to G/L account 650030## in company code 1010, you need to define the company code-specific settings with the following values: Field Name

Value

Control Data Tab: Account Currency:

EUR

Tax Category

V1 which means 19%

Posting without tax allowed

mark


1 (Primary costs/cost-reducing revenues)

Create/Bank/Interest Tab: YB04

Field Status Group:

a) Choose the New icon on the Definition on Company Code (0) b) In the New Company Code

tab.

field, enter 1010.

c) Choose the OK button. d) On the Control Data tab, enter the values provided in the table for and Cost Element Category fields. e) On the Create/Bank/Interest

Account Currency

, for Field Status Group: , enter YB04.

f) Choose the Save icon. g) Remain on this screen for the next task.


83




84

Define a GL account




Unit 5 Lesson 2 Defining Cost Centers



Cost Center Accounting

Figure 59: Standard Hierarchy of Cost Centers in a CObArea

The cost center is master data in a CO area that represents a delimited location where costs occur. You can use cost centers for differentiated assignment of overhead costs to organizational activities based on utilization of the relevant areas (cost determination function), and for differentiated controlling of costs arising in an organization (cost controlling function). The CO-OM-CCA component tracks where costs occur in your organization. Cost centers can be defined according to several design approaches, such as functional requirements, allocation criteria, activities, and services provided geographic location or area of responsibility. The approach should be consistent throughout the enterprise. As a typical approach, an enterprise can define a cost center for each low-level organizational level that has responsibility for managing costs. As costs are incurred, they are assigned or posted to


85



the appropriate cost center. These costs can include payroll costs, rent and utility costs, or any other costs relevant to a cost center. The posting and assignment of costs to cost centers makes managerial accounting possible, which is a vital step for utilizing other CO components. Cost Center Data The Basic Data section contains basic information of a cost center, such as the cost center’s name and description, the name of the cost center manager and the department to which you want to assign the cost center. The Cost Center Hierarchy field displays the standard hierarchy node to which the cost center is assigned. This field must be filled so it can be used as a control feature in Overhead Management Accounting. Each CO area must have a unique standard hierarchy that includes every cost center created in that CO area. The cost center belongs to a responsible organizational area, mostly represented by a profit enter, to which you assign the cost center. The Company Code and Segment represent the close ties between Management Accounting and FI. If a CO area has more than one company code, you must specify the company code that the user links to each cost center. If a segment reporting is required, you can derive the segment via a profit center, which you enter in the cost center master record.

Figure 60: Cost Center Data

The cost center master record is time dependent and assigned to a node of the standard cost center hierarchy. Additionally you assign the cost center to organizational units like company code and functional area. You can assign a cost center to a profit center. The control data is used to lock the cost center against planning and posting activities.

86



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining Cost Centers

Statistical Key Figures

Figure 61: Statistical Key Figures

Statistical key figures are nonmonetary information that you can plan and post on cost centers (and other cost objects). They are used as additional reporting info in cost center reports, to calculate additional key figures, such as average salaries per employee, and as distribution factors to distribute cost from one cost center to another. An example could be the distribution of cost of a facility cost center to other cost centers along the space in sq. m (or sq.ft.) that they use. To allow the system to calculate the total, you need to determine the category value, as follows: ●

●

Fixed: the periodic values can not be added to a total. The system will calculate the total of a period as an average of the single values. Total: the periodic values can be added to a total.


87



88




Unit 5 Exercise 6 Create and Display Cost Centers

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create Cost Center SERV-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Don’t use the Cost Center app, because this is a factsheet for a cost center. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code alternative.

KS01 as an

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by Apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to get the transaction codes back. Enter the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

SERV-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Person Responsible

your name

Cost Center Name

service ##

Cost Center Description

service Cost Center of Group ##

Cost Center Category

H

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCA##

2. Search for your cost center. 3. Create Cost Center PROD-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Use the cost center SERV-## as reference. Enter or change the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000


89



90

Field

Value

Cost Center

PROD-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Reference Controlling Area

A000

Reference Cost Center

SERV-##

Cost Center Name

Production ##


production Cost Center of Group ##

Person Responsible

your name


F

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCB##




Unit 5 Solution 6 Create and Display Cost Centers

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create Cost Center SERV-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Don’t use the Cost Center app, because this is a factsheet for a cost center. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code alternative.

KS01 as an

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by Apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to get the transaction codes back. Enter the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

SERV-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Person Responsible

your name

Cost Center Name

service ##


service Cost Center of Group ##


H

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCA##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad. Use the search tool to search for Centers and open the app.

manage Cost

b) Click the Add icon. c) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record. d) Choose Continue .


91



e) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record and choose You receive the message

Data saved .

f) Leave the screen by pressing

Back

Save .

2. Search for your cost center. a) In the Cost Center field, enter SERV-## .

The more letters you write, the less items are in the list of search results.

b) Choose the Go icon to see the final list of search results. c) Set your cursor on the name of your cost center in the list and choose d) Close the active window and leave the app by choosing

Display

Back .

3. Create Cost Center PROD-## with the appropriate transactual app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for manage Cost centers . Use the cost center SERV-## as reference. Enter or change the following data: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

PROD-##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Reference Controlling Area

A000

Reference Cost Center

SERV-##

Cost Center Name

Production ##


production Cost Center of Group ##

Person Responsible

your name


F

Hierarchy area

TS4F20##

Company Code

1010

Profit Center

T–PCB##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad. Use the search tool to search for Centers and open the app.

manage Cost

b) Choose Add . c) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record. d) Choose Continue . e) Enter the required data for the cost center master data record and choose

92

You receive the message

Data saved .

f) Leave the screen by pressing

Back

Save .



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining Cost Centers




93



Unit 5 Lesson 3 Posting a GL Account Document



●


Document Structure

Figure 62: External Postings with SAP S/4HANA Finance

Postings in other areas of SAP S/4HANA, which are relevant for Accounting, are posted to Financials via an Accounting Interface. The line items of the postings are stored according to the new data model in the ACDOCA table (called “Universal Journal”). As some Modules are not (or not yet) changed to the new data model, data may be stored only in the old tables (known from ERP) or in the old tables additionally.

94



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Posting a GL Account Document

Posting Keys

Figure 63: The Posting Key

Each document line item contains one posting key. A posting key controls the following for each document line item: ●

Account type to be posted

●

Type of posting (debit or credit)

●

Fields of the line item may have or require an entry

Universal Journal Entry (ACDOCA)

Figure 64: Universal Journal Entry (ACDOCA)

The new journal entry consists of a header (table BKPF) and the respective items (table ACDOCA) There are rare cases where entries in ACDOCA are written without a respective document header (for example, carry forward, corrections in migration). These entries do not represent standard business processes. The corresponding line items have ‘artificial document numbers’ beginning with letters (for example, ‘A’).


95



The ACDOCA table contains all fields needed for G/L, CO, AA, ML, PA, providing one single “source of truth” for all these modules. For CO, the universal journal also contains all cost elements, including secondary cost elements, which are in SAP S/4HANA G/L accounts too. In addition, the universal journal has Multi-GAAP capability by using an uses a 6 digit field for line item numbering and 23 digits for currency fields.

RLDNR dimension,

As in ERP, the Universal Journal can be easily extended with customer fields. The extensibility is available for all components that use the Universal Journal (G/L, CO, AA, ML), as follows: ●

●

●

P&L line extension using “CO-PA capabilities” is provided, both for field definition (characteristics) and the rich derivation tools from CO-PA. The standard General Ledger coding block extensibility can be used and affects the Universal Journal. The new SAP HANA based reporting of all components (G/L, AA, ML, CO) can access the customer fields.

Prima Nota The Prima Nota is the source document that triggers the creation of Journal Entries. It is the single anchor that allows, for example, the reversal of the complete process triggered by the Prima Nota. The Prima Nota keeps the information that has been entered to the system, before derivations, enrichments, splits, and so on, take place in Accounting in order to create Journal Entries. In many cases, the Prima Nota is a document outside Financials. Examples are Expense Reports, Invoices, and Payroll documents. For posting within the Financials world, a Prima Nota is needed as well. For classical FI postings (FB01, FB50, FB60, FB70, and so on), the Prima Nota is still stored in the BSEG table and the corresponding Journal Entries (can be several due to the multi GAAP capability) are written to the ACDOCA table. For classic (manual) CO postings, the Prima Nota is still written to COEP table. The corresponding journal entries are written to the ACDOCA table. A Prima Nota is written as well in cases, where “CO” is triggered via BAPI interfaces (AWTYP <> AFRU, CATS) For allocation postings (assessment, settlement, and so on), no Prima Nota is required and data is written to the ACDOCA table only. The allocation process has its own history management (for example, canceling an allocation journal entry) Material price changes (MR21) or Material Debit/Credit (MR22) create a Prima Nota in the material ledger (tables MLHD, MLIT, and so on). The respective journal entries are posted to ACDOCA.

96




Posting to a GL Account

Figure 65: Maintain Financial Statement Version

In a financial statement version, you can define a structure for the balance sheet and Profit & Loss statements reports. You can maintain the structure and you can add G/L Accounts and ranges of G/L accounts to the structure items.


97



98




Unit 5 Exercise 7 Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

Business Example When you record business transactions in an application component such as Financial Accounting (FI), your company wants to be sure that the corresponding cost data is also transferred to Management Accounting in real-time without reconciliation runs. Enter business transactions in FI to see how the system uses the corresponding account assignment logic to automatically transfer the information to Management Accounting. Process Management Accounting reports to display these business transactions and drill down to access the source documents. In this exercise, in the general ledger (FI), post an expense that is relevant to a cost center and determine which costs are transferred to Management Accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a general ledger (G/L) account posting, with today’s date, for the raw materials purchase for the German company code 1010 in EUR currency. Enter a debit amount of 2975 including 19% tax for G/L account 650030##. Specify that the offsetting credit is to be made to G/L account 11100000. 2. On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Cost Center Report

Cost Centers — Plan/Actual

.

3. Drill down to the original document


99



Unit 5 Solution 7 Create a Posting from Financial Accounting

Business Example When you record business transactions in an application component such as Financial Accounting (FI), your company wants to be sure that the corresponding cost data is also transferred to Management Accounting in real-time without reconciliation runs. Enter business transactions in FI to see how the system uses the corresponding account assignment logic to automatically transfer the information to Management Accounting. Process Management Accounting reports to display these business transactions and drill down to access the source documents. In this exercise, in the general ledger (FI), post an expense that is relevant to a cost center and determine which costs are transferred to Management Accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a general ledger (G/L) account posting, with today’s date, for the raw materials purchase for the German company code 1010 in EUR currency. Enter a debit amount of 2975 including 19% tax for G/L account 650030##. Specify that the offsetting credit is to be made to G/L account 11100000. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose

Post General Journal Entries

.

b) On the screen, enter the following data: Table 1: Values for a General Ledger Account Posting

100

Field Name or Data Type

Value

Document Date

Current Date

Company Code

1010

Posting Date

Current Date

Transaction Currancy

EUR

Period

Current Period

Journal Entry Type

SA

Line Item (1) Company Code

1010

(1) G/L Account

650030## Vehicle Cost

(1) Debit Amount

2500

(1) Assignment Open the assignment to select Cost Center

SERV-##




Field Name or Data Type

Value

(1) Tax Code

V1 (19 %)

(2) G/L Account

11100000 (Bank Account)

Credit Amount

2975

In the area “Tax Items”: mark

Calculate tax

c) Check, if the Total Balance is 0. To post your journal entry, choose the d) To check your document, select the

Post button.

Display button.

2. On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Cost Center Report a) On the Cost Centers: Plan/Actual Selection

Cost Centers — Plan/Actual

.

screen, enter the following data:

Table 2: Values for the Cost Centers — Plan/Actual Report Field Name or Data Type

Value

Fiscal Year

Current Year

Category

0 (Version)

Period

Current Period

Company Code

1010

Cost Center

SERV–## (your cost center)

Note: You can expand for searching possible entries. The when you compress the expanded entry fields. b) To execute the report, choose the

Start Selection

Go button is only visible

button.

3. Drill down to the original document a) To select the actual line items you want, position the cursor on the cell. b) Select the Jump to button and select the option c) check the filter

Display G/L Line Items

status . You may have to change it to

d) To get detailed information, choose

report.

All items and then press

Go

Journal Entry .

To jump to the original document posted by you in the previous step 1, choose the Journal Entry hypertext.


101



102




Unit 5 Exercise 8 Display an G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Balances 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the balance of account

Run the balance for current year and period. 2. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Line Items account 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the line items of

Run the report for current period. 3. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Cost Centers (Actuals) center SERV-## in company code 1010.

to look up the line items of cost

Run the report for current period.


103



Unit 5 Solution 8 Display an G/L Account and G/L Account Line Items

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Balances 650000## in company code 1010 .

to look up the balance of account

Run the balance for current year and period. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

Display G/L Account Balances

tile in the

b) Enter the following data in the screen: Field Name

Value

Ledger

0L

Company Code

1010

G/L Account

650030##

Ledger Fiscal Year

Current year

Period from

Current period

Period to

Current period

Controlling Area

A000

c) Choose Go. d) Click the debit amount to see the line items resulting in this total. e) Click the Journal Entry number to see the details of the item. f) Choose Display Accounting Document

to see the posting document.

If this does not work (message FB03 does not exist), use transaction the training system T41. g) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing 2. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display G/L Account Line Items account 650000## in company code 1010 .

FB03 directly in

Home . to look up the line items of

Run the report for current period. a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

Display G/L Account Line Items

tile in the

b) Enter the following data in the screen:

104




Field Name

Value

Ledger

0L

Company Code

1010

G/L Account

650030##

Status

All Items

Posting Date

This Month

Ledger Fiscal Year

Current year

Controlling Area

A000

c) Choose Go. d) Click the Journal Entry number to see the details of the item. e) Choose Display Accounting Document

to see the posting document.

If this does not work (message FB03 does not exist), use directly in the training system T41.

FB03 as transaction code

f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing 3. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Cost Centers (Actuals) center SERV-## in company code 1010.

Home . to look up the line items of cost

Run the report for current period. a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the Controlling group of the Launchpad.

Display Cost Centers (Actuals)

tile in the

b) Enter the following data in the screen: Field Name

Value

Fiscal Year is

2016

Posting Period is

11

Company Code is

650030##

Cost Center is

SERV-##

c) Choose Start Selection . d) Eliminate the Row is statistical Cost Center e) Select the available field

Profit Center to the area Rows

You may need to adjust the columns in your column Profit Center

Data Analysis area afterwards to see the

f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing


Home .

105



Financial Statement

Figure 66: Financial Statement

A financial statements shows all G/L Accounts in a structure, which you define in the financial statement version. You can switch between the balance sheet and the Profit & Loss view. By adding additional filters, you can focus on certain segments or Profit Centers.

106




Unit 5 Exercise 9 Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

Business Example Check, if your new account 650030## is already assigned to the financial statement version 1010 . Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. The new account should be included in the financial statement version 1010 . Check the financial statement subfolder 3180000 other operating expenses . You will find this subfolder under 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income .


107



Unit 5 Solution 9 Check an Account in the Financial Statement Version (Optional)

Business Example Check, if your new account 650030## is already assigned to the financial statement version 1010 . Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. The new account should be included in the financial statement version 1010 . Check the financial statement subfolder 3180000 other operating expenses . You will find this subfolder under 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income . a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Maintain Financial Statement Version tile in the General Ledger group of the Launchpad. b) Click into the empty field left of Financial Statement Version complete line. c) Choose Financial Statement Items

1010 to mark the

.

d) Drill down to the 3000000 Profit and loss statement → 3100000 Annual net income/ net loss → 3200000 operating income → 31800000 other operating expenses balance sheet item by clicking the folder icon in front of the balance sheet item. e) Check whether the interval 65003000 to 65003099 is entered (you need to page down) and D & C (for debit and credit balance) is marked. If not, change accordingly. f) Leave the app by closing the window.

108




Unit 5 Exercise 10 Display a Financial Statement

Business Example Run a (restricted) balance sheet to see if the postings to your new account 650030## are also displayed in the balance sheet. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Financial Statement to run the balance sheet for your account 650030## in company code 1010 using financial statement version 1010 . Hint: If your postings show up in the section All Accounts under Accounts not assigned , in practice, you would have to alter the financial statement version and include your new account. Run the financial statement for the current posting period (for current year and previous year). Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Company Code

1010

Ledger

0L

Financial Statement Version

1010

Fin. State. Type

Normal

End Period

Current period and current year

Comparison End Period

Current period and current year – 1

Currency

EUR


109



Unit 5 Solution 10 Display a Financial Statement

Business Example Run a (restricted) balance sheet to see if the postings to your new account 650030## are also displayed in the balance sheet. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Choose the SAP Fiori app Display Financial Statement to run the balance sheet for your account 650030## in company code 1010 using financial statement version 1010 . Hint: If your postings show up in the section All Accounts under Accounts not assigned , in practice, you would have to alter the financial statement version and include your new account. Run the financial statement for the current posting period (for current year and previous year). Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Company Code

1010

Ledger

0L

Financial Statement Version

1010

Fin. State. Type

Normal

End Period

Current period and current year

Comparison End Period

Current period and current year – 1

Currency

EUR

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the General Ledger group of the Launchpad.

Display Financial Statement

tile in the

b) Enter the data provided in the table. c) Choose Go. d) Choose Profit & Loss .

110




e) Enter the G/L account number 650030## into the search field on the right hand side and choose the magnifying glass button to search in the hierarchy. The G/L account is displayed in the balance sheet hierarchy. If not, click All Accounts . Your account is displayed under Accounts not assigned . f) Return to the SAP Fiori Launchpad screen by choosing


Home .

111



LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:

112

●


●





Unit 5 Lesson 4 Working with Business Partners and Invoices



●


Vendor Master Record - Business Partner

Figure 67: Business Partner Approach in SAP S/4HANA

There are redundant object models in the traditional ERP system where the vendor master and customer master is used. The (mandatory) target approach in SAP S/4HANA is the Business Partner approach. Business partners can be categorized as a person, group, or organization. ●

An organization represents units such as a company (for example, a legal person), parts of a legal entity (for example, a department), or an association. Organization is an umbrella term to map every kind of situation in the day-to-day business activities.

●

A group represents a shared living arrangement, a married couple, or an executive board.

With current development, transaction BP is the single point of entry to create, edit, and display master data for business partners, customers, and vendors.


113



Business Partner and Assigned Roles

Figure 68: Business Partner and Assigned Roles

The Business Partner is created and the roles necessary for the usage of the BP are assigned. The different roles are created on certain organizational levels. The role FI Vendor, which is necessary to use the BP in FI based purchase postings, is assigned to the company code. So, the data in this role can be maintained in each company code different. Note that vendor is also called supplier. You can assign a different vendor number and customer number to your BP inside the BP maintenance transaction. In the general role of the business partner, the BP’s name and address is entered. In the role FI vendor (BP used as a vendor in FI) you enter the following data: ●

The currency used for transactions with the vendor

●

The terms of payment

●

The names of important contacts related to the vendor (for example, salespeople)

●

The reconciliation account from the general ledger (G/L), because the vendor is a creditor of the company

You can decide, whether to maintain many roles at once or to add roles later time by time, whenever you need them.

114



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Business Partners and Invoices

Document Entry View for Accounting Document

Figure 69: Document Entry View for Accounting Document

In the figure, Entry View for Accounting Document, a vendor’s invoice is posted and the services are charged to two different cost centers. Each line item is assigned to a different cost center, profit center, and segment. The figure displays the journal entry. Corporate groups may have a requirement to create balance sheets at the segment level. As you can see in the figure, the vendor line is not assigned to a segment. The segments only receive the expense posting, and not the balance sheet posting, which prevents an accurate balance sheet by segment. This is why SAP uses document splitting. Document Split in the General Ledger View

Figure 70: Document Split in the General Ledger View

Note: The layout or display variant of the document sorts segments with subtotals in ascending order in the Segment column.


115



You can specify in Customizing that the system needs to complete the missing entries automatically. The correct amount is shown in the figure You activate document splitting to ensure the segment characteristic splits uniformly. Systematic segmentation means that each document has a zero balance for the entity in question. There are six lines in the document now. The vendor line item and the tax item are split across the two (segments A and B). The balance for each segment is zero. You can create the balance sheet and profit and loss (P&L) statement in full, and the system balances the balance sheet in the background. The figure also shows how the accounts payable and the tax items inherit the segment entity in the document. Document splitting reduces the time and effort the user spends entering documents. Entering six account assignment items would be time consuming. Document splitting is only possible in the new General Ledger. There are two views of the posted documents - the Entry view and the General Ledger view. You can decide which view to use. If you do not need document splitting or it is inactive (for example, the customer only needs to create balance sheets at the company code level), then both views are identical. Customer invoices that distribute revenues among various entities are handled in the same way. Payment Process

Figure 71: Payment Process

You can pay vendors manually or by using the automatic payment program. The standard system contains common payment methods and corresponding forms defined by country. The system performs the following actions during the payment:

116




●

Posts payment documents

●

Clears open items

●

Prepares data for printing the payment media


117



118




Unit 5 Exercise 11 Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

Create a new Business Partner master record to use as vendor and as customer as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner app from your Central Master Data — Business Partner group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 2. Create the new business partner and maintain the information:

General Data using the following

Field Name

Value

Business Partner Categorization

Organization

Business Partner

T-BP##

Grouping

External alpha-numeric numbering

Title

Company

Name

Bikes & More ##

Street/House Number

Pascalstr. ##

Postal Code/City

70173 Stuttgart

Country

DE (Germany)

Region

BW (Baden-Wurttemberg)

Language

German

3. Maintain the Company Code Data information:

for the new business partner using the following

Field Name

Value

BP Role

FI Vendor (FLVN00)

Company Code

1010

Reconciliation Account

21100000

4. Maintain the Tax Classification on the

Control Data and use the following information:

Field Name

Value

BP Role

Vendor (BBP000)


119



120

Field Name

Value

Country

DE

Tax Type

MWST

Tax Group

FULL




Unit 5 Solution 11 Create a Business Partner (FI Vendor)

Create a new Business Partner master record to use as vendor and as customer as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Maintain Business Partner app from your Central Master Data — Business Partner group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad. a) Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile in your Central Master Data — Business Partner group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Create the new business partner and maintain the information:

General Data using the following

Field Name

Value

Business Partner Categorization

Organization

Business Partner

T-BP##

Grouping

External alpha-numeric numbering

Title

Company

Name

Bikes & More ##

Street/House Number

Pascalstr. ##

Postal Code/City

70173 Stuttgart

Country

DE (Germany)

Region

BW (Baden-Wurttemberg)

Language

German

a) Choose the Create Organization b) Fill the fields Business Partner

button. and Grouping .

c) On the Address tab, maintain the corresponding data. d) Save your entries, but don’t leave the screen. 3. Maintain the Company Code Data information:

for the new business partner using the following

Field Name

Value

BP Role

FI Vendor (FLVN00)


121



Field Name

Value

Company Code

1010


21100000

a) Switch to change mode by using the respective button. b) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value

FI Vendor.

c) Click the Company Code button at the top of the screen. d) Enter the Company Code. e) On the Supplier: Account Management Account.

tab page, enter the

Reconciliation

f) Save your entries, but don’t leave the screen. 4. Maintain the Tax Classification on the

Control Data and use the following information:

Field Name

Value

BP Role

Vendor (BBP000)

Country

DE

Tax Type

MWST

Tax Group

FULL

a) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value

Vendor.

b) Click the Control button on the screen. c) Enter the required data d) Save your entries but don’t leave the screen.

122




Posting a Vendor Invoice in FI


123



124




Unit 5 Exercise 12 Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

Business Example We receive a service invoice for the inspection of two company cars. The invoice refers to two different cost centers and thus two different profit centers. The invoice amount is EUR 1,785. The amount includes input tax (tax code V1) of 19%, that is, EUR 285 . EUR 1000 is attributed to the cost center, SERV-##, and EUR 500 to cost center PROD-##. Use your vendor TBP## . The invoice has the previous day as the invoice date and was sent directly to the accounting department, without going through logistics invoice verification. The invoice has the number 4## . The G/L account assignment is to account 650030## (Vehicle Costs). Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the invoice from vendor T-BP## using the SAP Fiori app Create Incoming Invoices on the two cost centers specified (SERV-## and PROD-##). Use the Z_WITH_COST_CENTER screen variant. Use the G/L account 650030## as an offsetting account. Enter the invoice number in the Reference field and enter Inspection costs group ## as the text. Write down the accounting document number: Document Number:__________________________________________________________________________ _ Display the document. Choose a layout in which the Profit Center field is displayed. You want to make sure that this document is suitable for creating financial statements at profit center level. Call up the relevant document view. 2. Display the document. If possible, use the Menue icon on the left upper area of the screen. Use the option to switch between each document view. If this is not possible, leave the app and choose the app Manage Journal Entry on your Launchpad to show the document. Use a layout in which all the relevant fields are displayed. If this is not the case, choose layout / AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area). What distinguishes the Entry View from the Leading Ledger view?


125



Unit 5 Solution 12 Enter a Vendor Invoice with Document Splitting

Business Example We receive a service invoice for the inspection of two company cars. The invoice refers to two different cost centers and thus two different profit centers. The invoice amount is EUR 1,785. The amount includes input tax (tax code V1) of 19%, that is, EUR 285 . EUR 1000 is attributed to the cost center, SERV-##, and EUR 500 to cost center PROD-##. Use your vendor TBP## . The invoice has the previous day as the invoice date and was sent directly to the accounting department, without going through logistics invoice verification. The invoice has the number 4## . The G/L account assignment is to account 650030## (Vehicle Costs). Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the invoice from vendor T-BP## using the SAP Fiori app Create Incoming Invoices on the two cost centers specified (SERV-## and PROD-##). Use the Z_WITH_COST_CENTER screen variant. Use the G/L account 650030## as an offsetting account. Enter the invoice number in the Reference field and enter Inspection costs group ## as the text. Write down the accounting document number: Document Number:__________________________________________________________________________ _ Display the document. Choose a layout in which the Profit Center field is displayed. You want to make sure that this document is suitable for creating financial statements at profit center level. Call up the relevant document view. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad.

Create Incoming Invoices

tile in the

b) Enter the company code if the company code dialog box appears. Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

c) Press Enter. d) On the Basic data tab page, enter the following data:

126

Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Invoice date




Field Name

Value

Posting date

Reference

4##

e) Press Enter. f) Confirm warning messages with

Enter .

A link to the vendor master record is now shown on the right of the screen. g) Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Amount

1785

Tax amount

285

Tax code

V1 (19% Input Tax)

Text

*Inspection costs group ##

h) Select the Tree on button. In the Screen variants for items folder, select the variant, Z_WITH_ COST_ CENTER. Enter the following in separate line items: Field Name

Value

G/L account

650030##

D/C

Debit

Amount in doc. curr.

1000

Tax code

V1

Cost center

SERV-##

Field Name

Value

G/L accountt

650030##

D/C

Debit

Amount in doc. curr.

500

Tax code

V1

Cost center

PROD-##

i) Choose Post . Do not choose the

Park document

icon.

j) Make a note of the accounting document number. k) Do not close the

Create Incoming Invoices

browser tab page.

2. Display the document. If possible, use the Menue icon on the left upper area of the screen. Use the option to switch between each document view. If this is not possible, leave the app and choose the app Manage Journal Entry on your Launchpad to show the document. Use


127



a layout in which all the relevant fields are displayed. If this is not the case, choose layout / AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area). What distinguishes the Entry View from the Leading Ledger view? a) Choose Document → Display in the menu bar. You are in the data entry view, Display Document: Data Entry View . You see the three line items that you entered and the tax item generated automatically by the system. b) On line item level, choose the layout variant /AC_1 (Layout with Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Funct. Area) from the Layout Setting Global drop down list. . This layout shows that the two expense items refer to different profit centers and segments. The vendor line item and the tax item are displayed without profit center and segment assignment c) Choose the General Ledger View button to switch from the Data Entry View to the General Ledger View of Ledger 0L. Instead of the four line items, six are displayed in the Leading Ledger view (the ledger views are also called general ledger or split views). After the amounts in the G/L account have been split, the amounts for the vendor payables and tax items are split in the same way. This ensures that the balance for each profit center is zero. Note: To ensure that the balance sheet can also be created at profit center and/or segment level, the balance must be zero in the document at profit center and/or segment level. This is why document splitting is used. When the document is posted, the system automatically splits the document according to the Customizing settings. d) Close the Create Incoming Invoices

128

browser tab.




Unit 5 Exercise 13 Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

Business Example The vendor T-BP## , requires the money urgently, and asks the accounting department to make the payment quickly. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Make sure, the correspondence language of your Business Partner Master Record TBP## is set to the language of your country. You may adjust it using the app Business Partner .

Maintain

2. Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous cheque printing. The payment is to be made via the house bank S4F10 and Account—ID GIRO. Enter LP01 as the printer. Have the system calculate the payment amount. Use payment method

S.

3. Write down the number of the payment document and print out the check. Document number: _______________________________ 4. Check whether the outgoing payment has cleared the original open item, and write down how much cash discount was calculated and posted.


129



Unit 5 Solution 13 Post a Manual Outgoing Payment with Check Printing

Business Example The vendor T-BP## , requires the money urgently, and asks the accounting department to make the payment quickly. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Make sure, the correspondence language of your Business Partner Master Record TBP## is set to the language of your country. You may adjust it using the app Business Partner . a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. b) Enter Business Partner c) In the menu bar, choose


Maintain tile in the

T-BP## and press Enter. Business Partner

d) Enter your Correspondence language entered already.

→ Display <-> Change .

on the Address tab page if it has not been

You will find this field in the Name area of the tab page. e) Choose Save . f) Close the Maintain Business Partner

browser tab page.

2. Post a manual outgoing payment with simultaneous cheque printing. The payment is to be made via the house bank S4F10 and Account—ID GIRO. Enter LP01 as the printer. Have the system calculate the payment amount. Use payment method

S.

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Post Supplier Outgoing Payments With Print tile in the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. The Payment with printout: Header Data

screen is displayed.

Hint: If you do not see this header screen, use the Back icon to return to it. Once you access this header screen when you log on, the system assumes you want to keep the same header information for all single cheques. This screen is therefore skipped after you enter data on it for the first time.

130




b) Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

Payment method

S

House bank

S4F10

Printer for forms

LP01

Calculate pmnt amnt

Select

Print immediately

Select

c) Choose the Enter Payments

button.

d) In the Payee section, enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

e) Adopt all of the other data. f) Choose Process Open Items

.

g) If the open item is not automatically selected (Assigned = 0,00), double-click the EUR Gross amount. h) Choose Post . i) If House Bank – ID and Acct. – ID is required for posting the outgoing payment, enter the following data: Field Name

Value

House Bank

S4F10

Acct. ID

GIRO

j) Choose Post . 3. Write down the number of the payment document and print out the check. Document number: _______________________________ a) Write down the number of the payment document. b) Confirm information about the document number with

Enter .

This automatically displays an overview of generated payment media. c) Double-click Check in the Overview of generated payment media

window.

d) Place the cursor on the correct spool file checkbox. e) Choose the Display contents

icon.

The cheque is displayed and can be printed from the printer that is installed. Use the scroll bar to view the entire cheque. f) Close the Post Supplier Outgoing Payments With Print


browser tab page .

131



4. Check whether the outgoing payment has cleared the original open item, and write down how much cash discount was calculated and posted. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Manage Supplier Line Items tile in the Accounts Payable group of the Launchpad. Enter the following data in the filter bar: Field Name

Value

Supplier

T-BP##

Company Code

1010

Status

Cleared Items

Clearing Date

Current date

Item Type

Normal Items

b) Choose Go. c) Click the payment document number 15XXXXXXXX. d) Choose Manage Journal Entries

on the Document number

e) If only one line item is displayed, choose the screen.

window.

Back to Journal Entry

on the bottom right of

Depending on the payment conditions of your business partner you may see the item for posting the cash discount received (account number 70040000). If the vendor T-BP## grants a 3% cash discount for payment made within 14 days, you will receive a cash discount of 45 EUR on your payment of 1500 EUR. In addition, 8.55 EUR are will be posted to the input tax account as a tax on sales or purchases. f) Choose the Home button to go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

132




Unit 5 Exercise 14 Display Vendors Account

Look up the balance of your vendor to verify the balance is zero. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Look up the balance of your vendor by using the


Display Supplier Balances

app.

133



Unit 5 Solution 14 Display Vendors Account

Look up the balance of your vendor to verify the balance is zero. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Look up the balance of your vendor by using the

Display Supplier Balances

app.

a) Enter your supplier T-BP## and press Go. You will see the debits and credits by period on your suppliers account. b) Click the debit or credit amount to drill down to the according line item. c) Click a document number to see the available apps to which you can navigate. Choose Display Fact Sheet . You see several documents and info related to the vendors account. d) Navigate back to the Launchpad.

134






●



135



Unit 5 Lesson 5 Working with Asset Accounting



Creating an Asset Master Record

Figure 72: Assets in Financial Accounting (FI) Organizational Units

Each asset belongs to a company code and a segment. All postings made for the asset (acquisitions, retirements, depreciation, and so on) are applied in the assigned company code and segment. Additionally, you can assign the asset to various Controlling (CO) objects (cost center, internal order, activity type, and so on) and logistic organizational units (for selection purposes only).

136



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Asset Accounting

Asset Class

Figure 73: Asset Class

An asset class is the main criterion for defining an asset. Each asset has to be assigned to an asset class. In an asset class, you can define certain control parameters and default values for depreciation and other master data. Assets that do not appear in the same line item of the balance sheet (such as buildings and equipment) must be assigned to different asset classes. Additionally, there is at least one special asset class for assets under construction and one asset class for low-value assets. Examples for Asset Classes include the following: ●

3100 - Vehicles

●

4000 – Assets under construction

●

5000 – Low-value assets

Note: You can also create asset classes for intangible assets and leased assets. Functions are available for processing leases. The Plant Maintenance application component is used for the technical management of assets. The Treasury application component is used for managing financial assets.


137



Posting an Aquisition of an Asset

Figure 74: Asset Explorer

The Asset Explorer offers an overview of the activity for an asset. You can see transactions that have been posted to the asset. You can also see planned and posted depreciation per depreciation area, per period, for each fiscal year. You can drill down to the details of the Financial Accounting (FI) transactions. You can branch to master data and other cost objects, and perform simulations. Depreciation Areas

Figure 75: Depreciation Areas

138




Asset balances and transactions often need to be valuated differently, for various purposes. To have more than one valuation basis, depreciation areas are kept in SAP. Separate transaction figures are kept in each area per asset and depreciation area, as well as for individual value components (such as balances, depreciation, and the remaining book value) the asset master record, different data for valuation areas is stored. The data controls the calculation of normal and special depreciation for the respective valuation areas. Therefore, you can use a different depreciation method for general business procedures as compared to the depreciation method that the tax authorities require. Control Data in Depreciation Areas

Figure 76: Control Data in Depreciation Areas

In the asset master record, different data for valuation areas is stored. The data controls the calculation of normal and special depreciation for the respective valuation areas. Therefore, you can use a different depreciation method for general business procedures compared to the depreciation method that the tax authorities require.


139



140




Unit 5 Exercise 15 Create an Asset Master Record

Business Example Your company is purchasing a car to enlarge the car fleet. You need to create an asset master record in asset class 3100 (Vehicles) with the description, Car for my car fleet ##. Let us assume, the legal depreciation time is 5 years. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create an asset master record and assign the new office building to cost center SERV-##, using the data from the following table: Field Name

Value

Asset Class

3100 (Vehicles)

Company Code

1010

Number of similar assets

1

Description

Car for my car fleet ##

Cost Center

SERV-##

2. Save the asset, and make a note of the asset number: ________________________. Note: It is not necessary to note the zero after the blank at the end of the asset number. It represent the asset subnumber. 3. Display the asset master record, and identify how many depreciation areas are displayed. Seven depreciation areas are displayed for the asset. In this case, some depreciation keys of the depreciation areas are different, so different calculations are being driven.


141



Unit 5 Solution 15 Create an Asset Master Record

Business Example Your company is purchasing a car to enlarge the car fleet. You need to create an asset master record in asset class 3100 (Vehicles) with the description, Car for my car fleet ##. Let us assume, the legal depreciation time is 5 years. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create an asset master record and assign the new office building to cost center SERV-##, using the data from the following table: Field Name

Value

Asset Class

3100 (Vehicles)

Company Code

1010

Number of similar assets

1

Description

Car for my car fleet ##

Cost Center

SERV-##

a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Create Asset Master tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AS01. b) On the Create Asset: Initial screen , enter the asset class, company code, and the number of similar assets, using the values in the table. c) Choose the Master data button. d) On the General tab page, enter the e) On the Time-dependent

Description , using the value in the table.

tab page, enter the

Cost Center , using the value in the table.

2. Save the asset, and make a note of the asset number: ________________________. a) Choose Save . b) On the status bar, note the asset number, excluding the zero after the blank at the end. c) Leave the app.

Note: It is not necessary to note the zero after the blank at the end of the asset number. It represent the asset subnumber.

142




3. Display the asset master record, and identify how many depreciation areas are displayed. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Display Asset Master tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AS03. b) On the Display Asset: Initial screen, in the Asset field, enter the asset number that you noted earlier in the exercise, and choose Enter . c) On the Display Asset: Master data d) On the Deprec. areas

screen, choose the

Deprec. Areas tab.

tab page, count the number of depreciation areas listed.

Seven depreciation areas are displayed for the asset. In this case, some depreciation keys of the depreciation areas are different, so different calculations are being driven.


143



144




Unit 5 Exercise 16 Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

Business Example Your company (company code 1010) purchased a car from vendor T-BP##. You need to post the asset acquisition. The value of the car is EUR 20,000. The tax of 19% is not included in the price. This exercise uses a record created in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data. The record is the asset master record with description Car for my Car Fleet ##. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Post an integrated asset acquisition, that is, post the asset acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. The company code is 1010. The invoice and posting date is today’s date. The input tax of 19% (V1) is in addition to the net amount. Ensure that you use the payment terms 0001. Use transaction type 100 (External asset acquisition). Hint: For posting purposes, use the F4 help to search for the asset with the description Car for my Car Fleet ##. FI document number: _______________________________________ 2. Display the FI document. 3. Which accounts were posted to in the operational part (vendor invoice) and the valuation parts (asset accounting) of the document. 4. Use the Asset Explorer ( 360° view on Asset app) to check the values of the new asset in the depreciation area, 32 (IFRS in local currency). 5. What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year?

6. Close the browser tab page


360° view on Asset .

145



Unit 5 Solution 16 Post an Integrated Asset Acquisition

Business Example Your company (company code 1010) purchased a car from vendor T-BP##. You need to post the asset acquisition. The value of the car is EUR 20,000. The tax of 19% is not included in the price. This exercise uses a record created in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data. The record is the asset master record with description Car for my Car Fleet ##. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Post an integrated asset acquisition, that is, post the asset acquisition and the amount payable to the vendor in one document. The company code is 1010. The invoice and posting date is today’s date. The input tax of 19% (V1) is in addition to the net amount. Ensure that you use the payment terms 0001. Use transaction type 100 (External asset acquisition). Hint: For posting purposes, use the F4 help to search for the asset with the description Car for my Car Fleet ##. a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the Acquisition without order (integrated AP) tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code F-90. Make a note of the FI document number. Use the following data: Field Name

Value

Document Date/Posting Date

Current date

Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR

First line item Posting key (PstKy)

31

Account

T-BP##

b) Press Enter and enter the following data:

146

Field Name

Value

Amount

23,800




Field Name

Value

Tax Amount

3,800

Tax code

V1 (19% Input Tax)

Payment terms

0001

Next line item PstKy (posting key)

70

Account

The asset number that you noted in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data (alternatively, use the F4 help to search for your asset with the description, Office building Hamburg ##)

TType (Asset Transaction Type)

100 External asset acquisition

c) Press Enter. To confirm the warning about changing the payment terms, press Enter. Field Name

Value

Amount

*

Tax code

V1

d) To view all account assignments, choose the

More button in the line item.

Field Name

Value

Reference Date

Current date

e) Choose Continue . f) Choose Post . g) Make a note of the FI document number. h) Remain on this screen. FI document number: _______________________________________ 2. Display the FI document. a) From the menu, choose

Document → Display .

3. Which accounts were posted to in the operational part (vendor invoice) and the valuation parts (asset accounting) of the document. a) The document is posted: ●

To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

●

Via the vendor to the payables balance sheet account (21100000)

●

To the tax account (12600000)

b) Choose the Asset Accounting


button.

147



The document is posted for accounting principle ●

●

IFRS and Ledger Group

Via the asset to the APC (acquisition and production costs) balance sheet account (16001000) To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

c) Choose Accounting Principle principle LG: Local GAAP.

to display the posting in relation to the accounting

The document is posted for accounting principle ●

●

0L:

LG: Local GAAP and ledger group

2L :

Via the asset to the APC (acquisition and production costs) balance sheet account (16001000) To the technical clearing account for integrated asset acquisitions (16014000)

4. Use the Asset Explorer ( 360° view on Asset app) to check the values of the new asset in the depreciation area, 32 (IFRS in local currency). a) Go to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and choose the 360° view on Asset tile in the Asset Accounting group of the Launchpad. Alternatively, enter the transaction code AW01N. Enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Company code

1010

Asset

The asset number that you noted in the exercise, Create Asset Master Data (alternatively, use the F4 help to search for your asset with the description, Car for my Car Fleet ##)

b) Select Depreciation area 32 (IFRS in local currency) from the structure on the left hand side of the screen.

Depreciation Areas

folder

5. What are the planned and posted depreciation values for the current year? In contrast to the planned values, the posted depreciation is still 0 because the depreciation is not posted until the depreciation posting run is executed 6. Close the browser tab page

148

360° view on Asset .




Depreciation Run

Figure 77: Depreciation Run

Every asset transaction in Asset Accounting (AA) immediately causes a change in the forecasted depreciation. However, it does not immediately cause an update of the depreciation and value adjustment accounts for the balance sheet and profit and loss statements. The planned depreciation is posted to the G/L when you run the periodic depreciation posting run. This posting run uses a batch input session to post the planned depreciation for each posting level. It posts each individual asset as a lump-sum amount. The actual depreciation is posted in Asset Accounting (FI-AA) and the General Ledger (G/L) only after the depreciation posting run is completed. The depreciation is posted to the corresponding depreciation accounts in the G/L and to the Controlling (CO) cost object assigned to the asset master record. The depreciation run can be in the direct or batch mode.


149



Transaction Type

Figure 78: Transaction Type

The transaction type is an addition to the asset posting keys 70 (debit) and 75 (credit). It must be included when posting to an asset account. The transaction type is necessary for AA because it specifies exactly where the asset posting is listed on the asset history sheet. The transaction type is the distinguishing characteristic of the various asset postings. Some asset postings are as follows:

150

●

Buying and selling

●

Credit memos

●

Acquisitions from internal production

●

Adjustment postings

●

Retirements without revenue

●

Depreciation and appreciation







151



Unit 5 Lesson 6 Working with Activity Types



●


Rates Planning

Figure 79: General Ledger (G/L) Accounts and Cost Elements

The chart of accounts is created in Financial Accounting (FI). Expense accounts to which the system posts the costs for cost accounting purposes must be created with G/L Account type P (Primary costs or revenues) or S (Secondary cost elements). This ensures that all postings to this type of expense account always arrive in Management Accounting at the same time on a Management Accounting object, for example, cost center, internal order, project. In addition a cost element category is assigned. You can use the cost element only as predefined by the assigned cost element category.

152



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Activity Types

Figure 80: Activity Types

The activity type classifies the activities performed within a company by one or several cost centers. If a cost center provides services for other cost centers, orders, and processes, this means that the resources of the cost center are used. The costs of these resources need to be allocated to the receivers of the activity. Activity types serve as tracing factors for this cost allocation. In an internal activity allocation, the quantity of the activity, such as the number of consulting hours, is entered either manually or automatically into SAP S/4HANA Finance. The system calculates the associated cost based on the activity price, and generates a debit to the receiver and a credit to the cost center providing the activity for quantity and costs. To perform the allocation, the system uses a secondary cost element that is stored in the activity type master record as default values. You can restrict the use of the activity type to certain types of cost centers by entering the allowed cost center categories in the activity type master record. You can enter up to eight allowed cost center categories, or leave the assignments unrestricted by entering an asterisk (*).


153



154




Unit 5 Exercise 17 Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. 1. Create a secondary cost account 943110## by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for Manage G/L Account Master Data. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code redirected to transaction code FS00.

KA01, but you will be

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to restore these transaction codes.

Note:

Enter the following data: Field

Value

G/L Account

943110##

Company Code

1010

Description

Consulting Hours ##

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

G/L Account Type

Secondary Costs

Account group

SECC — Secondary Costs / revenue

Group Account Number

50304000


43

Unit of Measurement

H

Field Status Group

YB04

2. Create an activity type by using the app Press Create and enter the following data:


MANAGE ACTIVITY TYPES.

155



Field

Value

Activity Type

Pers##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Name

personnel hours ##

Cost Center Categories

* (All)

Activity unit

H

Activity Type Category

Manual Entry, Manual Allocation

Allocation Cost Element

943110##

3. Assign your activity type Pers## to your cost center SERV-## and enter an activity price. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

SERV-##

Activity Type

PERS##

. Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

50

Variable Price

80

4. Assign the activity types 1420, 1421 and 1422 to your cost center PROD-## and enter activity prices. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data:

156

Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12




Field

Value

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

PROD-##

Activity Type

1420

to

1422

Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

40

Variable Price

60


157



Unit 5 Solution 17 Create a Secondary Cost Account and an Activity Type

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. 1. Create a secondary cost account 943110## by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori launchpad. Search with the search tool for Manage G/L Account Master Data. Note: In the training system you can still use transaction code redirected to transaction code FS00.

KA01, but you will be

SAP Note 1946054 describes which transaction codes are substituted by apps. SAP Note 2084604 describes how to restore these transaction codes.

Note:

Enter the following data: Field

Value

G/L Account

943110##

Company Code

1010

Description

Consulting Hours ##

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

G/L Account Type

Secondary Costs

Account group

SECC — Secondary Costs / revenue


50304000


43

Unit of Measurement

H

Field Status Group

YB04

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and open the b) Enter the account number

158

Manage G/L Account app.

943110##, the company code, and choose

Create .




c) Enter the required data for the account master record up to


d) On the Control Data tab, enter the rest of the data provided in the table up to Status Group . e) On the Create/bank/interest

tab, in the Field Status Group

.

Field

field, enter YB04.

f) Choose Save . You receive the message

Data saved.

g) Leave the screen by closing the browser tab. 2. Create an activity type by using the app Press Create and enter the following data:

MANAGE ACTIVITY TYPES.

Field

Value

Activity Type

Pers##

Valid from

1.1.actual year

Valid to

31.12.9999

Name

personnel hours ##

Cost Center Categories

* (All)

Activity unit

H

Activity Type Category

Manual Entry, Manual Allocation

Allocation Cost Element

943110##

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori Launchpad and open the

Manage Activity Type app.

b) Enter the required data for the activity type. c) Choose Save . d) Leave the app. 3. Assign your activity type Pers## to your cost center SERV-## and enter an activity price. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

SERV-##

Activity Type

PERS##


159



. Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

50

Variable Price

80 Enter

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad and use the search tool to search for Activity Price and open the app. b) In the Planner profile field, enter sapall and choose the green checkmark. c) Enter the data provided in the first table and choose

Overview Screen .

d) Enter the data provided in the table for price information and choose

Save .

e) Leave the screen by closing the browser window. 4. Assign the activity types 1420, 1421 and 1422 to your cost center PROD-## and enter activity prices. You do both by using the appropriate transactional app in your SAP Fiori Launchpad. Search with the search tool for Enter Activity Price Use the following data: Field

Value

Planner profile

sapall

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal Year

actual year

Cost Center

PROD-##

Activity Type

1420

to

1422

Use the following price information: Field

Value

Price (fixed)

40

Variable Price

60 Enter

a) Navigate to the SAP Fiori launchpad and use the search tool to search for Activity Price and open the app. b) In the Planner profile field, enter sapall and choose the green checkmark. c) Enter the data provided in the first table, mark Screen .

Form-Based and choose

d) Enter the data provided in the table for price information and choose

160

Overview

Save .




e) Leave the screen by closing the browser window.


161



Activity Allocations

Figure 81: Cost Center and Activity Type

After creating both the cost center and activity type master records, you then assign a planned price to this combination. The system uses this price to valuate the quantity entered in the direct activity allocation. You specify this in the SAP S/4HANA Finance system by planning the activity output or prices for a cost center. To enable this, the SAP system provides a wide range of options. You can enter the planned price manually or you can have the system calculate it.

162




Assessment

Figure 82: Assessment

For some cost centers, you cannot determine sensible output quantities, for example, facility management cost centers, because they do not really bring out any countable services for others. In this case you may choose to distribute the cost along to a sensible measurement factor, like number of persons using the facility. So you could decide to plan or post the statistical key figure “Number of Employees” to the receiving cost centers and to allocate the cost along this tracing factor. Even if you use activity allocations, the sender may be not balanced at the end of the period. So you may choose to allocate the balance of the cost center by an assessment to others in order to bring the cost center to a balance of zero.


163



164




Unit 5 Exercise 18 Post an Activity Allocation

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Allocate 20 hours of the activity type PERS## from cost center SERV-## to cost center PROD–## by using the Enter Activity Allocation app. Use the search tool to find the app. Field

Value

Send. CCtr

SERV-##

SAtyTyp

PERS##

Rec. CCtr

PROD-##

Total Quantity

40

2. Check the CO documents that have been created using the Documents app.

Display Actual Controlling

3. Check the FI documents that have been created using the Display G/L Account Line items app. Verify the posting has a portion of fix cost and save your report as new tile in your launchpad group. Ledger

0L

G/L Account

943110##

Status

All Items

Time Interval

From Posting Date

Posting Date

1.1. actual month


165



Unit 5 Solution 18 Post an Activity Allocation

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Allocate 20 hours of the activity type PERS## from cost center SERV-## to cost center PROD–## by using the Enter Activity Allocation app. Use the search tool to find the app. Field

Value

Send. CCtr

SERV-##

SAtyTyp

PERS##

Rec. CCtr

PROD-##

Total Quantity

40

a) In the Launchpad, open the

Enter Activity Allocation app.

b) Enter the required data. c) Choose Post (Ctrl + S). d) Note the document number and leave the app. 2. Check the CO documents that have been created using the Documents app. a) In the Launchpad, open the

Display Actual Controlling

Display Actual Controlling Documents

app.

b) Enter your Document number or choose the Selection Options icon, choose User Name , and enter your User. Enter Document number from 1 to 9999999999. Be sure not to enter more than 10 digits. c) Choose Execute . d) Drill down from your document to the line items. Set your cursor on your cost center and press the Details icon. You see the posting amount as total value and as fixed value. e) Close the window. 3. Check the FI documents that have been created using the Display G/L Account Line items app. Verify the posting has a portion of fix cost and save your report as new tile in your launchpad group.

166

Ledger

0L

G/L Account

943110##

Status

All Items




Time Interval

From Posting Date

Posting Date

1.1. actual month

a) In the Launchpad, open the

Display G/L Account Line items

b) Enter the required data and choose

app.

Go.

c) Choose Settings , select Fixed amt in GC in the list of columns, and choose You see the new column

Go.

Fixed amt in GC as last column in your list.

d) Move the Fixed amt in GC column with pressed left mouse button to stand behind the column Amount in CC Crcy Note: The value flows between controlling objects are visible in Financial Accounting directly in real time and with the original cost element or account. The values are posted on the same account in Financial Accounting and Management Accounting. We use the same source of truth , which is the Universal Journal (table ACDOCA). So we see of course the same information independent from viewing the data with a FI or a CO report. e) Press in the screen area Line items on the name of the screen variant. Choose Use Name with fix amount, select Set as Default , and choose OK.

Save as .

f) Choose Share to save the report as new tile. Enter as title My G/L Account line items with fix portion and use your launchpad group as Group g) Leave the app


167




168

●


●





Unit 5 Lesson 7 Working with Internal Orders



Internal Orders

Figure 83: Internal Orders

An internal order is a flexible Controlling (CO) tool that can be used for various purposes (to track costs and revenues within a controlling area, for example). Internal orders provide capabilities for planning, monitoring, and allocating costs. Internal orders can be grouped into the following general categories: ●

Overhead orders Overhead orders are used to monitor overhead costs incurred for a particular purpose, such as conducting a trade fair or tracking costs for maintenance and repair work.

●

Investment orders Investment orders are used to monitor costs incurred in the production of a fixed asset, such as building a storage facility.

●

Accrual orders


169



Accrual orders are used to offset postings of accrued costs (costs calculated in CO) to cost centers. ●

Orders with revenue Orders with revenue are used to replace the cost accounting parts of Sales and Distribution (SD) sales orders if SD is not being used. This category is used to track both costs and revenues. If billing is not automated, these orders are also used to monitor revenues that do not affect the core business of an organization, such as miscellaneous revenues.

Internal Order Data

Figure 84: Internal Order Data

The internal order master record consists of different sections. Each section is represented by a tab with predefined field groups. You can change the tab title in Customizing and assign different fields to the tabs. The Order type field is the most important field in the internal order master data. This field allows you to specify the default values for the different master data fields. It also allows you to define certain order characteristics, such as the settings for settlement, planning, and budgeting, depending on what the order is used for. You can use internal orders for planning, collecting, monitoring, and settling costs of certain operations and tasks in an enterprise. You can use the SAP system to control your internal orders throughout the life cycle of an internal order (from creation to final settlement, including planning and posting actual costs).

170



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Working with Internal Orders

Posting to a Real Internal Order

Figure 85: Posting to a Real Internal Order

You can post actual data to an internal order, debiting the internal order. In a cost allocation to the order, the order is debited and the sender is credited. If the internal order is a “real” controlling object, the debits are posted with value type (actual cost) and can be settled later. In addition to the real posting, you can address other “statistical” objects, which will be posted “statistically”. Statistical cost can be used only for analysis purposes, but not for allocations and do not count in any reconciliation between CO and other modules.

04

Figure 86: Posting to a Statistical Order


171



If you mark the internal order to be statistical, you can assign cost to the order in addition to the posting on a real object. An example is as follows: You want to collect the cost for your car fleet on a cost center but additionally for each single car on a separate internal order. The statistical order allows you to post cost of a car “real” on the cost center and at the same point of time “statistical” on the appropriate internal order for that car. The advantages include the following: ● ●

You can analyze the cost on the order and on the cost center at once. You don’t have to settle the order later (and you cannot settle the order later), which would consume time and would result in an additional financial document.

Note: A statistical order should be used, if you only want to collect the cost of an object or an action for reporting purposes without the requirement to allocate the cost to other cost objects later. Order Settlement

Figure 87: Order Settlement

Internal orders are usually used as an interim collector of costs and aid the planning, monitoring, and reporting processes. When a task is complete, the costs have to be passed on to their final destination, such as cost center, fixed asset, and profitability segment. This process is called settlement. It is another form of periodic cost allocation. Depending on the type of internal order and its business purpose, a settlement will occur at the end of each period or at the end of the life of an order.

172




An order settlement can be made to different types of receivers as long as the receivers are defined as valid in Customizing and no impending system restrictions (such as locks) prevent settlement. The figure shows examples of possible settlement receivers. A settlement rule must be defined for each order. This rule is defined in the order master record. The settlement rule may specify that all of the costs on the order are settled to a single receiver or may be split to multiple receivers. Settlement can be structured flexibly by using one of the many available settlement options. Results of Settlement

Figure 88: Results of Settlement

During a settlement, the actual costs incurred on an internal order are allocated to one or more receivers. The system automatically generates offsetting entries to credit the internal order. After settlement, the balance of the internal order should be zero. The costs settled are updated on the corresponding receiver object and displayed in reporting.


173



174




Unit 5 Exercise 19 Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

Business Example You want to collect cost which are partially connected to your car fleet on a separate order for better controlling. Later you want to settle certain portions of the cost to the cost center SERV-## and to your cost center PROD-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create an Internal Order for Overhead Cost Management Create an internal order for overhead management by using the

Manage Internal Orders

app.

1. Start the App and enter the following data: Field

Value

Order Type

1000

Order number

HD-XY## (this is an external order number, reflecting your car licence number)

Description

Cost for maintenance services

Currency

EUR

Assignments: Company Code

1010

Object Class

Overhead Costs

Profit Center

T-PCA##

Cost Center Responsible

S4F20

Maintain as Settlement rule: Field

Value

ID 001 Category

Cost Center

Receiver

SERV-##

%

30

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

ID 002 Category


Cost Center

175



176

Receiver

PROD-##

%

70

Settlement Type

Full Settlement




Unit 5 Solution 19 Maintain Master Data of an Internal Order

Business Example You want to collect cost which are partially connected to your car fleet on a separate order for better controlling. Later you want to settle certain portions of the cost to the cost center SERV-## and to your cost center PROD-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create an Internal Order for Overhead Cost Management Create an internal order for overhead management by using the


app.

1. Start the App and enter the following data: Field

Value

Order Type

1000

Order number

HD-XY## (this is an external order number, reflecting your car licence number)

Description

Cost for maintenance services

Currency

EUR

Assignments: Company Code

1010

Object Class

Overhead Costs

Profit Center

T-PCA##

Cost Center Responsible

S4F20

Maintain as Settlement rule: Field

Value

ID 001 Category

Cost Center

Receiver

SERV-##

%

30

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

ID 002 Category


Cost Center

177



Receiver

PROD-##

%

70

Settlement Type

Full Settlement

a) Navigate to the


app and choose

Create .

b) Enter the data provided in the table. c) Choose Maintain Settlement Rule

.

d) In the Distribution Rules screen area, choose

Insert .

e) Enter the data provided in the second table into the line with line ID 001. f) Choose Insert again and enter the data from the second table into the line with line ID 002. g) Choose Done to leave the settlement rule maintenance and choose order.

178

Save to save your




Unit 5 Exercise 20 Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

Business Example You know that the orders used by the departments of your group are updated when business transactions are carried out in Materials Management and Financial Accounting, as well as directly in Management Accounting. In this case we assume that some service cost are directly posted from Financial Accounting to the internal order HD-XY##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. Create G/L Account Postings Create G/L account postings for your marketing brochure overhead order and for your motor pool order and compare the results in the information system. 1. In the SAP Fiori app, Post General Journal Entries services using the data in the table.

, create a posting for layout consulting

Field

Value

Document Date

current date

Posting Date

current date

Company Code

1010

Transaction Currency

EUR

1st Line Item: G/L Account

65001000

Debit Amount

4000

Choose Details Tax Code

V1 (19%)

Order

HD-XY##

2nd Line Item: G/L Account

10010000

Credit Amount

4760

Tax Item: Calculate Tax


check the box

179



2. In the SAP Fiori app, Internal Orders Plan/Actual , check the effect of the G/L account postings on your order HD-XY##. Display the posted document. Field

Value

Fiscal year

current fiscal year

Category

0

Posting Period Order Number

180

is

current period HD-XY##




Unit 5 Solution 20 Create Transaction-Based Postings to an Internal Order

Business Example You know that the orders used by the departments of your group are updated when business transactions are carried out in Materials Management and Financial Accounting, as well as directly in Management Accounting. In this case we assume that some service cost are directly posted from Financial Accounting to the internal order HD-XY##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number provided by your instructor. Create G/L Account Postings Create G/L account postings for your marketing brochure overhead order and for your motor pool order and compare the results in the information system. 1. In the SAP Fiori app, Post General Journal Entries services using the data in the table.

, create a posting for layout consulting

Field

Value

Document Date

current date

Posting Date

current date

Company Code

1010

Transaction Currency

EUR

1st Line Item: G/L Account

65001000

Debit Amount

4000

Choose Details Tax Code

V1 (19%)

Order

HD-XY##

2nd Line Item: G/L Account

10010000

Credit Amount

4760

Tax Item: Calculate Tax


check the box

181



a) In SAP Fiori, search for and open the

Post General Journal Entries

b) Enter the data from the table and choose c) If no error messages show up, choose

app.

Simulate . Post .

d) Leave the App. 2. In the SAP Fiori app, Internal Orders Plan/Actual , check the effect of the G/L account postings on your order HD-XY##. Display the posted document. Field

Value

Fiscal year

current fiscal year

Category

0

Posting Period

is

current period

Order Number

HD-XY##

a) In SAP Fiori, search for and open the

Internal Orders Plan/Actual

app.

b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose Start Selection . Check the posting on your order on G/L account 65001000. d) Choose Jump to . e) Select the Display G/L Line Items f) Change the Status to

report.

All Items and choose

Go.

g) Verify the document number in the Journal Entry column and the related amount according to the posting.

182




Unit 5 Exercise 21 Settle Orders at Period-End

Business Example In this scenario you will settle your order to cost centers. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Perform a Settlement Run Carry out a settlement run for your marketing brochure order. 1. Run the actual settlement for your order using the app.

Execute Actual Settlement (Orders)

Check the Balance of your Order Check the balance of your marketing brochure order. 1. Call up the Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance

report for the current period.

What is the balance on your order?

2. Examine the costs that have been settled to each cost center ( SERV-## or PROD–## ). Call up the Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance report for the current period. Execute the report for each of the cost centers and the settlement cost element ( 92112000 ). Go to the Actual Line Items report and switch to the Secondary costs: Value settlement layout so you can see the partner objects of the transactions. Your marketing brochure order should be displayed as a partner object.


183



Unit 5 Solution 21 Settle Orders at Period-End

Business Example In this scenario you will settle your order to cost centers. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Perform a Settlement Run Carry out a settlement run for your marketing brochure order. 1. Run the actual settlement for your order using the app.

Execute Actual Settlement (Orders)

a) In SAP Easy Access, choose Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders End Closing → Single Functions → Settlement → Individual Processing . HD-XY##.

b) In the Order field, enter the order number c) In the Settlement period

→ Period-

field, enter order the current period.

d) In the Posting period , field, enter the current period. e) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. f) For the processing type, choose g) Deselect the

Automatic .

Test Run checkbox.

h) Choose Execute . i) Choose the Detail list icon. j) To display the cost element information, choose

Receiver .

k) Press Back . l) To display the accounting documents, choose the Accounting Document Number .

Accounting Documents

and double-click

m) Leave the Transaction. Check the Balance of your Order Check the balance of your marketing brochure order. 1. Call up the Orders: Actual/Plan/Variance

report for the current period.

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Internal Orders → Information System → Reports for Internal Orders → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Orders: Actual/Plan/ Variance . b) Choose Execute .

184




c) In the Controlling area field, enter A000. d) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. e) In the From period field, enter order the current period. f) In the To period , field, enter the current period. g) In the Plan version field, enter 0. HD-XY##.

h) In the first Or value(s) field, enter the order number i) Choose Execute . What is the balance on your order? The balance should be

zero (blank).

2. Examine the costs that have been settled to each cost center ( SERV-## or PROD–## ). Call up the Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance report for the current period. Execute the report for each of the cost centers and the settlement cost element ( 92112000 ). Go to the Actual Line Items report and switch to the Secondary costs: Value settlement layout so you can see the partner objects of the transactions. Your marketing brochure order should be displayed as a partner object. a) Choose Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Information System → Reports for Cost Center Accounting → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Cost Centers: Actual/Plan/Variance . b) In the Controlling area field, enter A000. c) In the Fiscal year field, enter the current fiscal year. d) In the From period field, enter order the current period. e) In the To period , field, enter the current period. f) In the Plan version field, enter 0. g) In the first Or value(s) field, enter cost center numbers

SERV-## to PROD–##.

h) Choose Execute . i) Double-click the report line for cost element 92112000. j) Double-click Cost Centers: Actual Line Items k) Choose Settings

→ Layout → Choose .

l) Double-click Secondary costs: Value settlement


.

.

185




186





UNIT 6

Human Capital Management

Lesson 1 Organizational Management in HCM

188

Exercise 22: Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational

189

Management

Lesson 2 HCM Master Data

195

Exercise 23: Create an Employee Master Data Record

197

Lesson 3 Executing a Payroll Run

202

Lesson 4 Integrating with Success Factors

203

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Understand the usage of Organizational Management

●

Explain the employee master data record

●

Execute a payroll run

●

Understand the integration with Success Factors


187



Unit 6 Lesson 1 Organizational Management in HCM



Organizational Management

188




Unit 6 Exercise 22 Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

Business Example As the responsible person for the structures in HCM, you need to extend the organizational structure because there is a need for a new position. You will create a new organizational unit for the project department and a new position for a project engineer in this department. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise use the cost center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create a Cost Center The data created in this exercise is required to created the employee master record in the next exercise. Create a New Organizational Unit for the Project Team Create a new organizational unit, TERP10-## as a member of the organizational unit TS410 .

Training

You need to log on to the backend system to create the organizational unit directly, because there is currently no SAP Fiori App available. 1. To create the organizational unit directly, og on to the backend system. 2. Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. 3. Search for the organizational unit, 4. Create a new organizational unit, Use the following information for the

Training TS410 . PRD-##, using the following information: Details for the Organizational Unit

Field

Value

Organizational Unit 1

PRD-##

Description

Project Department ##

:

Use the following information for the account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##


189


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 6: Human Capital Management

Create a New Position for the Project Engineer Create a new position for an employee in the production area. 1. Create the new position POS-## (Project Engineer ##) in the new organizational unit Project Department ##. Mark the newly created organizational unit Project Department ##.

190




Unit 6 Solution 22 Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management

Business Example As the responsible person for the structures in HCM, you need to extend the organizational structure because there is a need for a new position. You will create a new organizational unit for the project department and a new position for a project engineer in this department. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise use the cost center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create a Cost Center The data created in this exercise is required to created the employee master record in the next exercise. Create a New Organizational Unit for the Project Team Create a new organizational unit, TERP10-## as a member of the organizational unit TS410 .

Training

You need to log on to the backend system to create the organizational unit directly, because there is currently no SAP Fiori App available. 1. To create the organizational unit directly, og on to the backend system. a) On the SAP Logon, choose the entry user.

T41 and log on to the backend system with your

2. Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. a) From the menu tree, choose Human Resources → Organizational Management → Organizational Plan → Organization and Staffing → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code PPOME. b) Change the validity date to the first day of the current year and change the time period for 24 months. 3. Search for the organizational unit,

Training TS410 .

a) On the left side, choose

Find by Organizational Unit

b) In the dialog box, in the

With name field enter Training TS410.

4. Create a new organizational unit, Use the following information for the

PRD-##, using the following information: Details for the Organizational Unit

Field

Value

Organizational Unit 1

PRD-##


:

191



Field

Value

Description


Use the following information for the account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

a) Right-click the Training TS410 organizational unit and choose

Create .

b) Choose New relationship → Organizational Unit . c) In the Details for the Organizational Unit d) On the Account Assignment

, enter the data provided in the first table.

tab, enter the data provided in the second table.

e) To reassign the controlling area, choose the the controlling area A000 in the field.

Reassign Controlling area

icon and enter

f) Save your entries. Create a New Position for the Project Engineer Create a new position for an employee in the production area. 1. Create the new position POS-## (Project Engineer ##) in the new organizational unit Project Department ##. Mark the newly created organizational unit Project Department ##. a) Select the newly created Organizational Unit Production position and use the following data:

TERP10–## . Create a new

Basic data: Field

Value

Short Key

POS-##

Short Description

Production Worker ##

Account assignment: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

b) Select the Organizational Unit Project Department ## and create a new assignment. Choose the Create icon. In the dialog box, choose the position entry. On the Basic Data tab, enter the following data:

192



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Organizational Management in HCM

Field

Value

Short Key

POS-##

Short Description


c) On the Account assignment

tab, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Master Cost Center

PROD-##

d) Save the data.


193




194





Unit 6 Lesson 2 HCM Master Data

LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the employee master data record

●

To Create an Employee Master Data Record 1.


195



196




Unit 6 Exercise 23 Create an Employee Master Data Record

Business Example You hired a new Project Engineer. Therefore, you need to create an employee master record. The new employee will be assigned to the vacant position of the Project Department. This exercise requires the position, POS-## and the organizational unit, the exercise, Create a New Employee Master Record for a Project Engineer.

PRD-## , created in

The employee master record created in this exercise is required in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new employee master record using the old transaction, because there is no SAP Fiori app available. Log on to system T41 to create the master data record. Hire a new employee for the position PROD-## to be used in the project system later. The personal number will be given internally by the system. You will use the action HIRE to create the employee master record. Go to Personnel Actions (transaction code PA40) to create the employee master record. Use the following data to create the employee master record: Field

Value

Personnel number

Leave blank

From

Today’s date

Choose the HIRE Personnel Action and enter the following data: Field

Value

Personnel Area

1010

Employee Group

1

Employee subgroup

Y1

On the Create Personal data


Field

Value

Title

Own choice

Last Name

Own choice

First Name

Own choice

Birth date

Own choice


197



Field

Value

Nationality

German

On the Create Organizational Assignment

tab enter the following data:

Field

Value

Payroll Area

X0

Position

Number for PROD-##

Delimit the vacancy for the proposed day. In the Create Addresses

tab, enter any address data of your choice.

Note: We will not add any entries on the

Create Communication

tab.

Write down your personnel number. ____________________________________________________________

198




Unit 6 Solution 23 Create an Employee Master Data Record

Business Example You hired a new Project Engineer. Therefore, you need to create an employee master record. The new employee will be assigned to the vacant position of the Project Department. This exercise requires the position, POS-## and the organizational unit, the exercise, Create a New Employee Master Record for a Project Engineer.

PRD-## , created in

The employee master record created in this exercise is required in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new employee master record using the old transaction, because there is no SAP Fiori app available. Log on to system T41 to create the master data record. Hire a new employee for the position PROD-## to be used in the project system later. The personal number will be given internally by the system. You will use the action HIRE to create the employee master record. Go to Personnel Actions (transaction code PA40) to create the employee master record. Use the following data to create the employee master record: Field

Value

Personnel number

Leave blank

From

Today’s date

Choose the HIRE Personnel Action and enter the following data: Field

Value

Personnel Area

1010

Employee Group

1

Employee subgroup

Y1

On the Create Personal data


Field

Value

Title

Own choice

Last Name

Own choice

First Name

Own choice

Birth date

Own choice


199



Field

Value

Nationality

German

On the Create Organizational Assignment

tab enter the following data:

Field

Value

Payroll Area

X0

Position

Number for PROD-##

Delimit the vacancy for the proposed day. In the Create Addresses

tab, enter any address data of your choice.

Note: We will not add any entries on the

Create Communication

tab.

Write down your personnel number. ____________________________________________________________ a) To create the employee master data record, choose Human Resources → Personnel Management → Administration → HR Master Data → Personnel Actions . Alternatively, use transaction code PA40. b) On the Data Screen Personnel Actions tab, leave the personnel number blank (the number will be given internally). In the field from enter today’s date. For the action type Hire , enter the data provided in the relevant table. No entry is required on the

Create Actions tab.

c) Save the data. d) On the Create Personal Data

tab, enter the data provided in the relevant table.

e) Save your entries. f) On the Create Organizational Assignment table.

tab, enter the data provided in the relevant

g) Save your entries. h) On the Create Addresses

tab, enter any data of your own choice.

i) Save your entries.

200



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: HCM Master Data


Explain the employee master data record


201



Unit 6 Lesson 3 Executing a Payroll Run



Execution of a Payroll Run LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

202





Unit 6 Lesson 4 Integrating with Success Factors






203



204




UNIT 7

Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process

207

Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

208

Exercise 24: Create a Material Master Record

209

Lesson 3 Creating a Vendor Master Record

215

Exercise 25: Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

217

Lesson 4 Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records

222

Exercise 26: Create a Purchasing Info Record

223

Lesson 5 Creating Purchase Requisitions

228

Exercise 27: Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable

229

Material Exercise 28: Run an Internal Order Report - Commitments

233

Lesson 6 Creating Purchase Orders

236

Exercise 29: Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

237

Exercise 30: Run an Internal Order Report Exercise 31: Evaulate Purchase Orders

241 243

Lesson 7 Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

247

Exercise 32: Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

249

Exercise 33: Transfer Posting for Material

253

Lesson 8 Processing Vendor Invoices

256

Exercise 34: Post the Vendor Invoice


257

205


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 7: Purchase to Pay Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Exercise 35: Query the Supplier Account

261

Lesson 9 Processing the Automatic Payment Run Exercise 36: Create an Automatic Payment Run Exercise 37: View Vendor Accounts

265 267 273

UNIT OBJECTIVES

206

●

Describe the purchase to pay business process

●

Create a material master record

●


●

List additional vendor specific master data records

●

Create a purchase requisition for stock item and consumable material

●

Create a purchase order

●

Integrate ARIBA functionality with procurement in SAP S/4 HANA

●

Post a goods receipt for a purchase order

●

Post the vendor invoice

●

Process the automatic payment run




Unit 7 Lesson 1 Describing the Purchase to Pay Business Process



Purchase to Pay Overview LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



207



Unit 7 Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process



Material Master Data

208




Unit 7 Exercise 24 Create a Material Master Record

Business Example You have decided to include a stronger lock into your bicycle. Therefore, you need to create a new material master record for the lock to be included later in the structure (BOM) of the finished product. As a responsible person for the material master data you create a new material initially for plant 1010. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. The Material Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new material master record, Engineering and with the material type

T-R9## , for the industry sector Raw Materials , as follows:

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Industry Sector

Mechanical Engineering

Material Type

Raw Material

2. Create the following views for Plant ●

Basic Data 1

●

Purchasing

●

Purchasing Order Text

●

General Plant Data / Storage 1

●

Accounting 1

0101 in Storage Location

Mechanical

101C:

3. Enter the following data in the specified views: View

Data

Basic Data 1

The short description for the material Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-## . The base unit of measure is PC (Piece). The Lock is assigned to the material group L002 Material Group Raw Material. The gross weight and the net weight of the Lock is 50 G (Gram)


209



210

View

Data

Purchasing

Purchasing Group Z## is responsible for procuring the Lock. The Goods receipt processing time is 1 day. Reminder letters (expediters) regarding undelivered goods must be sent after 10, 20, and 30 days after the date when delivery is due. Under-delivery or over-delivery of the material is not acceptable. Choose the suitable purchasing value key. The material should be posted to Quality Inspection when posting Goods Receipt. Mark the corresponding entry.

Purchase Order Text

The material supplied must be in accordance with our technical specification 65432.


The Lock will be stored in storage bin BL-01 at the storage location 101C.

Accounting 1

You assign the Lock to the valuation class 3000 Raw Materials 1. The lock is valuated using the moving average price of €5 per 1 Piece. The currency automatically populates based on the company codes currency.




Unit 7 Solution 24 Create a Material Master Record

Business Example You have decided to include a stronger lock into your bicycle. Therefore, you need to create a new material master record for the lock to be included later in the structure (BOM) of the finished product. As a responsible person for the material master data you create a new material initially for plant 1010. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. The Material Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new material master record, Engineering and with the material type

T-R9## , for the industry sector Raw Materials , as follows:

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Industry Sector

Mechanical Engineering

Material Type

Raw Material


Mechanical

Create Material tile.

b) On the Create material (initial screen)

, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter. 2. Create the following views for Plant ●

Basic Data 1

●

Purchasing

●

Purchasing Order Text

●


●

Accounting 1

0101 in Storage Location

101C:

a) On the Select Views screen, select the views listed above. b) Choose Continue . c) In the Organizational Level dialog box, enter the following data:


211



Field

Value

Plant

1010

Stor. Location

101C

d) Choose Continue . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views: View

Data

Basic Data 1

The short description for the material Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-## . The base unit of measure is PC (Piece). The Lock is assigned to the material group L002 Material Group Raw Material. The gross weight and the net weight of the Lock is 50 G (Gram)

Purchasing

Purchasing Group Z## is responsible for procuring the Lock. The Goods receipt processing time is 1 day. Reminder letters (expediters) regarding undelivered goods must be sent after 10, 20, and 30 days after the date when delivery is due. Under-delivery or over-delivery of the material is not acceptable. Choose the suitable purchasing value key. The material should be posted to Quality Inspection when posting Goods Receipt. Mark the corresponding entry.

Purchase Order Text



The Lock will be stored in storage bin BL-01 at the storage location 101C.

Accounting 1

You assign the Lock to the valuation class 3000 Raw Materials 1. The lock is valuated using the moving average price of €5 per 1 Piece. The currency automatically populates based on the company codes currency.

a) On the Create Material T-R9## (Raw Material) Basic Data 1 tab:

212

screen, enter the following data on the

Field

Value

Description

Lock Ultra Strong TERP10-##

Base Unit of measure

PC

Material Group

L002

Gross Weight

50

Weight Unit

G

Net Weight

50



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the Master Data Used in the Purchase to Pay Process

b) On the Purchasing Data

view, enter the following information:

Field

Value

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Value Key

1

GR Processing Time

1

Post to Inspection Stock

X

c) Review any warning messages and choose the next data screen. d) On the Purchase order text

Enter to clear the messages and proceed to

screen, enter the following text:


e) On the Plant Data / Storage Location 1

tab, in the Storage Bin field, enter BL-01.

f) On the Accounting 1 data tab, enter the following information: Field

Value

Valuation Class

3000

Per Unit Price

5

Price Control

V

g) Save your entries and close the tile.


213




214





Unit 7 Lesson 3 Creating a Vendor Master Record



Vendor Master Record


215



216




Unit 7 Exercise 25 Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, approve invoices for payment, and carry out other processes, you must create a new vendor master record. You already know that the system maintains the vendor master data using various organizational levels. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master (Business Partner) that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. The Vendor Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new vendor master record (Organization) with the number T-BP## . Create the Business Partner in the BP role Supplier (new) and with the Grouping Ext. alpha-num. numbering . Note: When changing the BP role there is a message. Choose that appears. 2. Enter the following data on the

Create in the window

Address Data view:

Field

Value

Title

Company

Name

TERP10-##

Search Term 1

TERP10-##

Street

Any name you like

House number

Any number you like

Postal Code

69115

City

Heidelberg

Country

DE

Region

BW


217



Field

Value

Language

German

3. Create the Purchasing Data for Purchasing Organization

218

1010 using the following data:

Field

Value

Order Currency

EUR

Terms of payment

0001

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location 1

Heidelberg




Unit 7 Solution 25 Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, approve invoices for payment, and carry out other processes, you must create a new vendor master record. You already know that the system maintains the vendor master data using various organizational levels. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master (Business Partner) that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. The Vendor Master created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a new vendor master record (Organization) with the number T-BP## . Create the Business Partner in the BP role Supplier (new) and with the Grouping Ext. alpha-num. numbering . Note: When changing the BP role there is a message. Choose that appears. a) On the Launchpad, choose the


Create in the window

tile.

b) Enter the following data: Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

Create in BP role

Supplier (new)

Grouping

Ext. Alpha-num numbering

c) Press Enter. 2. Enter the following data on the

Address Data view:

Field

Value

Title

Company

Name

TERP10-##


219



Field

Value

Search Term 1

TERP10-##

Street

Any name you like

House number

Any number you like

Postal Code

69115

City

Heidelberg

Country

DE

Region

BW

Language

German

a) On the Address Data view, enter the data provided in the table 3. Create the Purchasing Data for Purchasing Organization

1010 using the following data:

Field

Value

Order Currency

EUR

Terms of payment

0001

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location 1

Heidelberg

a) On the Create Organization: role Supplier Data Screen Enter the Purchasing organization b) In the Purchasing Organization

, choose the

Purchasing icon. a)

field, enter 1010.

c) Press Enter. d) On the Purchasing Data

tab, enter the data provided in the table.

e) Check and Save the data.

220



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Vendor Master Record




221



Unit 7 Lesson 4 Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records



Vendor Info Record Conditions

222




Unit 7 Exercise 26 Create a Purchasing Info Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, you want to use purchasing info records including conditions, because you receive a lower price by ordering higher quantities. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Extend a Vendor Master Record, and the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record. The Purchasing Info Record created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. Create a New Purchasing Info Record for the Lock 1. Create a new purchasing info record for the procurement of your new material for your new vendor. Use the material number T-R9## and the vendor number T-BP## . Create a purchasing info record valid for all plants and purchasing organization 1010 , as follows: Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Material

T-R9##

Purchasing Org.

1010

2. Enter the purchasing organization data, base on an agreed delivery time of 2 days and standard quantity for ordering of 10 PC. Field

Value

Pl. Del. Time

2

Standard Qty

10

Purch Group

Z##

Net Price

5

3. Create the default gross price conditions. The vendor offers a quantity based price for this material as follows:


223



Qty

Price

Up to 99

5

from 100

4,75

From 500

4,50

Check the Created Purchasing Info Record You want to check the newly created purchasing info record. Therefore, you want to use a Fact Sheet App. 1. Check the purchasing Info Record. Search for the purchasing info record created today by all the participants.

224




Unit 7 Solution 26 Create a Purchasing Info Record

Business Example Your company recently redesigned one of the bicycles. Your company started a business relationship with a new vendor, which will supply the new stronger lock. To order from this vendor, you want to use purchasing info records including conditions, because you receive a lower price by ordering higher quantities. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Extend a Vendor Master Record, and the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record. The Purchasing Info Record created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. Create a New Purchasing Info Record for the Lock 1. Create a new purchasing info record for the procurement of your new material for your new vendor. Use the material number T-R9## and the vendor number T-BP## . Create a purchasing info record valid for all plants and purchasing organization 1010 , as follows: Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Material

T-R9##

Purchasing Org.

1010


Create Purchasing Info Record

b) On the Create Info Record Initial Screen

tile.

, enter the data provided in the table above.

c) Press Enter. There is no need to change any information In the

General Data view.

2. Enter the purchasing organization data, base on an agreed delivery time of 2 days and standard quantity for ordering of 10 PC. Field

Value

Pl. Del. Time

2

Standard Qty

10

Purch Group

Z##


225



Field

Value

Net Price

5

a) Choose the Purchasing Org. Data 1

icon.

b) On the Purchasing Organization Data 1

tab, enter the data provided in the table.

3. Create the default gross price conditions. The vendor offers a quantity based price for this material as follows: Qty

Price

Up to 99

5

from 100

4,75

From 500

4,50

a) Choose Conditions . b) In Create default gross Price Condition (PPR0): Fast Entry Scales .

, select the entry and choose

c) In the Data View for Scales , enter the data provided in the table. d) Press Enter and

Save the data record.

Check the Created Purchasing Info Record You want to check the newly created purchasing info record. Therefore, you want to use a Fact Sheet App. 1. Check the purchasing Info Record. Search for the purchasing info record created today by all the participants. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Purchasing Info Record

b) Choose Filters and include the

Material , Vendor , and Created on fields in the filter.

tile.

c) Save this choice as a variant. d) In the data screen Filters in the data section Purchasing Info Record choose more filters. Mark the fields Created on, Vendor, Material. e) Include these materials in the filter bar and save your settings. f) Name the Variant:

U_TERP10## and set as default.

g) Search for all the purchasing info records created today. Choose your info record and display the fact sheet.

226



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Listing Additional Vendor Specific Master Data Records




227



Unit 7 Lesson 5 Creating Purchase Requisitions



Purchase Requisitions Item Category Account Assignment Commitments

228




Unit 7 Exercise 27 Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

Business Example Your company is procuring new powerful stronger locks because it has redesigned one of its bicycles. The engineering department will use some of the locks and the rest of the locks will be received into inventory for use in production. Currently, only one vendor can supply the locks. You must create a purchase requisition for the locks, separating the stock portion from the consumable portion. Use a purchase requisition to document your requirements for the bicycle lock order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. The PReq created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a purchase requisitions for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9## . The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●

100 pieces will be placed in stock for plant

1010

10 pieces will be expensed to the Internal order you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order.

The valuation price for the material is

20.

Write down the Purchase requisition number:

Purchase requisition number:_______________________________ 2. Assign the vendor


T-BP## to both items.

229



Unit 7 Solution 27 Create a Purchase Requisition for a Stock Item and a Consumable Material

Business Example Your company is procuring new powerful stronger locks because it has redesigned one of its bicycles. The engineering department will use some of the locks and the rest of the locks will be received into inventory for use in production. Currently, only one vendor can supply the locks. You must create a purchase requisition for the locks, separating the stock portion from the consumable portion. Use a purchase requisition to document your requirements for the bicycle lock order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. The PReq created in this exercise is used in one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Create a purchase requisitions for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9## . The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010

10 pieces will be expensed to the Internal order you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 20.

The valuation price for the material is

Write down the Purchase requisition number: a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Create Purchase Requisition

b) On the Create Purchase Requisition

screen, choose

tile.

Create Own Item .

c) On the Create Own Item screen, enter the following data:

230

Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Valuation Price

20

Quantity requested

100



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Requisitions

Field

Value

Delivery Date

Today + 7 days

d) Enter the same information, but this time, for

Quantity requested

, enter 10.

e) Choose Add to cart . f) Choose the Shopping Cart and order the 2 Positions. g) Write down the Purchase requisition number in the space provided. h) Go Back to the Launchpad. Purchase requisition number:_______________________________ 2. Assign the vendor

T-BP## to both items.

a) Choose the Manage your Purchase Requisitions b) In the Manage Purchase Requisition enter the material number and press c) In your first item, choose

tile.

view, to search for your material number Go.

T-R9## ,

Edit and assign your source of supply.

Your vendor T-BP## should be assigned. d) In your second item, choose

Edit and assign your source of supply.

Your vendor T-BP## should be assigned. e) Go Back to the Launchpad.


231



232




Unit 7 Exercise 28 Run an Internal Order Report - Commitments

Business Example A commitment identifies costs which will be incurred in the future for materials and services requested or ordered. In the exercise, Create a Purchasing Info Record, you created a Purchase Requisition. You assigned the second item to your internal order from the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. Because of this, you recorded a preliminary commitment on your order. Now you evaluate the Commitments on this internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)

Your internal order from the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order

What is the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requisitions? Commitment / Purch.req.: __________________________________________


233



Unit 7 Solution 28 Run an Internal Order Report - Commitments

Business Example A commitment identifies costs which will be incurred in the future for materials and services requested or ordered. In the exercise, Create a Purchasing Info Record, you created a Purchase Requisition. You assigned the second item to your internal order from the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. Because of this, you recorded a preliminary commitment on your order. Now you evaluate the Commitments on this internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)


a) On the SAP Easy Access screen of the back-end system T41 Client 400. choose Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Information System → Reports for Internal Orders → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Additional Key Figures → Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments . Alternatively, use transaction code S_ALR_87012999. b) On the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments: Selection Screen in the table.

, enter the data provided

c) Execute the report. What is the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requisitions? Commitment / Purch.req.: __________________________________________

234



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Requisitions




235



Unit 7 Lesson 6 Creating Purchase Orders



●


Purchase Orders

236




Unit 7 Exercise 29 Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

Business Example Once the purchase requisition is created, you need to create a purchase order for the materials. You want to order from the supplier you created before. The responsible Purchasing Organization is 1010 and the Purchasing Group you are working in is Z##. You will procure 2 items. One item will be delivered for stock and the other item is procured directly for the internal order for testing. The material will be posted first into blocked stock. Make sure that the GR posting and the invoice posting can take place. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 1. Create a purchase order for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9##. The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010


2. Use the SAP Fiori app Change Purchase Orders (Advanced) Purchase Order created.

to check and change the

What is the number of the Purchase Order?

3. Use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Document supplier TERP10-## and your purchasing group


items to select all purchase orders for Z## .

237



Unit 7 Solution 29 Create a Purchase Order with Reference to PReq.

Business Example Once the purchase requisition is created, you need to create a purchase order for the materials. You want to order from the supplier you created before. The responsible Purchasing Organization is 1010 and the Purchasing Group you are working in is Z##. You will procure 2 items. One item will be delivered for stock and the other item is procured directly for the internal order for testing. The material will be posted first into blocked stock. Make sure that the GR posting and the invoice posting can take place. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master, created in the exercise, Create an Extend a Vendor Master Record, the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create a Material Master Record, and the Internal order that you created in the exercise, Maintaining Master Data of an Internal Order. 1. Create a purchase order for a total of 110 pieces of material T-R9##. The locks need to be delivered to plant 1010 one week from today. Your company will receive 110 pieces as follows: ●

●


1010



Manage Purchase Requisition

b) In the Manage Purchase Requisition enter the material number and press

view, to search for your material number Go.

c) Select the two purchase requisition items and press the d) In the Purchase Order Preview Submit button.

Create Purchase Order

T-R9## , icon.

screen, select the two Purchase orders and press the

e) In the Manage Purchase Requisition

screen, go back to the Launchpad.

2. Use the SAP Fiori app Change Purchase Orders (Advanced) Purchase Order created.

238

tile.

to check and change the


Change Purchase Order (Advanced)

b) On the Display Purchase Order Display/Change icon.

screen, to change the purchase order, choose the

tile.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Orders

c) Display the document overview and choose the Your Purchase Order should be visible in the

My Purchase Order

selection variant.

Document Overview .

d) Double-click the Purchase Order. The Purchase Order will be displayed. Note: Check that you are in change mode e) For the first item, delete the account assignment category any warning messages regarding the price or delivery date.

K and press Enter. Ignore

f) In the second line item, change the account assignment category to Ignore the warnings.

F and press Enter.

g) If necessary, press Enter again. h) Go to the item detail of item 20 and, in the Account Assignment tab, enter the internal order created in the unit – Internal Order – in Management accounting. Note: You can search for the order in Controlling Area description.

A000 and by your

i) Save the purchase order and write down the number. What is the number of the Purchase Order?

3. Use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Document supplier TERP10-## and your purchasing group a) On the Launchpad, choose the

items to select all purchase orders for Z## .

My Purchasing document items.

b) In the Manage Purchase Order Selection Go.

screen, enter the supplier

T-BP## and choose

c) Choose the Entry Purchase Order. The Purchase orders created should be shown.


239



240




Unit 7 Exercise 30 Run an Internal Order Report

Business Example In a previous exercise, you created a Purchase Requisition with an item, which was assigned to an internal order. Then you created a Purchase Order with reference to the Purchase Requisition. As a result the preliminary commitment on your internal order is changed to a fix commitment. Now check the amount of the commitment on your internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)


2. Note the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requirements and Purchase Order. Explain the change. Field

Value

Commitment / Purch.req Commitment /.Pur.Order


241



Unit 7 Solution 30 Run an Internal Order Report

Business Example In a previous exercise, you created a Purchase Requisition with an item, which was assigned to an internal order. Then you created a Purchase Order with reference to the Purchase Requisition. As a result the preliminary commitment on your internal order is changed to a fix commitment. Now check the amount of the commitment on your internal order. For this exercise, you work directly in the back-end system T41 and client 400. 1. Verify that the commitment has been recorded for your internal order. Process the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitment report for the current period and plan version 0. Execute the report for your internal order using the following information: Field

Value

Controlling Area

A000

Fiscal Year

Current Year

From Period

1

To Period

12

Plan Version

0

Or value(s)


a) On the SAP Easy Access screen of the back-end system T41 Client 400. choose Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Information System → Reports for Internal Orders → Plan/Actual Comparisons → Additional Key Figures → Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments . Alternatively, use transaction code S_ALR_87012999. b) On the Orders: Actual/Plan/Commitments: Selection Screen in the table.


c) Execute the report. 2. Note the amount of Commitment for Purchase Requirements and Purchase Order. Explain the change. Field

Value

Commitment / Purch.req Commitment /.Pur.Order

242




Unit 7 Exercise 31 Evaulate Purchase Orders

Business Example You want an overview of all of the Purchase Orders that have been created in the Company Code 1010. 1. Start the Manage Purchase Orders Launchpad. 2. Select Purchase Orders using the

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Company Code value of 1010

Do you find your Purchase Order from the previous exercise? Display your Purchase Order.


243



Unit 7 Solution 31 Evaulate Purchase Orders

Business Example You want an overview of all of the Purchase Orders that have been created in the Company Code 1010. 1. Start the Manage Purchase Orders Launchpad.

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori

a) Choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Select Purchase Orders using the

Company Code value of 1010

a) On the Manage Purchase Orders Screen Go.

, enter the Company Code 1010 and choose

b) To select your Purchase Order, click the arrow on the right side. Do you find your Purchase Order from the previous exercise? Display your Purchase Order.

244



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Purchase Orders

Integrate ARIBA Functionality with Procurement in SAP S/4HANA


245




246

●


●





Unit 7 Lesson 7 Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order



Goods Receipt Processing Quality Management Intergration


247



248




Unit 7 Exercise 32 Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

Business Example The material you ordered arrives in the Warehouse. You decided to post the 100 pc for stock first to blocked stock for a quality check. The 10 additional pieces you post for consumption. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order. 1. Enter a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order for the entire quantity of your material. For an easy way to select, use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Documents . Post the Quantity of 100 Pc to blocked stock in Storage Location 101C. As delivery note, enter TERP10-##. Record the Material Document Number.

__________________________________________________________ 2. Use the SAP Fiori app

Post Goods Movements

for the second item.

Record the Material Document Number. __________________________________________________________ 3. Use the SAP Fiori app

1010.

Stock Single Item to check the stock available in your plant

Write down the stock available: Unrestricted Use: __________________________________________________________ Quality Inspection:__________________________________________________________ Blocked Stock:__________________________________________________________


249



Unit 7 Solution 32 Post a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

Business Example The material you ordered arrives in the Warehouse. You decided to post the 100 pc for stock first to blocked stock for a quality check. The 10 additional pieces you post for consumption. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order created in the exercise, Create a Purchase Order. 1. Enter a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order for the entire quantity of your material. For an easy way to select, use the SAP Fiori app My Purchasing Documents . Post the Quantity of 100 Pc to blocked stock in Storage Location 101C. As delivery note, enter TERP10-##. Record the Material Document Number.

__________________________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose

My Purchasing Document Items

b) In My Purchasing Document Item

, select the vendor

T-BP## and choose

c) In the result list, go to purchase orders, choose the first item, and choose Receipt for Purchase Orders . d) Enter the Delivery Note TERP10-## in the header, the Stock Type Blocked stock for the first item.

Go. Post Goods

Storage Location

101C , and the

e) Post the Goods Receipts. f) Write down the Material Document Number in the space provided above. g) Go back to the Launchpad. 2. Use the SAP Fiori app

Post Goods Movements

for the second item.

Record the Material Document Number. __________________________________________________________ a) In the Post Goods Movements app, search for your Purchase order number by using the Binocular icon. Alternatively, enter your Purchase Order Number directly. b) Choose the Find Purchase Order c) In dialog box, enter your Supplier Find .

icon. T-BP## or your material number

T-R9## and choose

d) In the result list, select the second item of your purchase order, double-click the entry, and close the result list.

250



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order

e) In the item overview, flag the material as OK. f) Enter your Delivery note number

TERP10-## in the header of your document.

Note: When the OK field is closed in the overview, close the item detail. g) Post the Goods Receipts. h) Write down the Material Document Number in the space provided above. i) Go back to the Launchpad. 3. Use the SAP Fiori app

1010.

Stock Single Item to check the stock available in your plant

Write down the stock available: Unrestricted Use: __________________________________________________________ Quality Inspection:__________________________________________________________ Blocked Stock:__________________________________________________________ a) In the Stock Single Material field.

app, enter your material number,

T-R9##, in the header

b) Write down the stock available in the spaces provided above. c) Look at the material documents posted and the document flow, select the entry with the storage location and select the Material Documents Overview icon. d) Select the first material document and display the material document. e) In the material document, open the f) Click the Purchase Order


Document Flow section.

to display the Purchase Order.

251



252




Unit 7 Exercise 33 Transfer Posting for Material

Business Example After you have posted the goods receipt to the blocked stock you check the material. After the inspection and the approval of the quality you want to transfer the material now to unrestricted use stock. You want to use an SAP Fiori app to perform the posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order.

Material Qty created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for

1. Transfer the entire quantity of 100 pc of material stock. Use an app for this posting.

T-R9## in plant 1010 from blocked

2. Transfer the quantity of 100 pc from blocked stock to unrestricted use stock. 3. View the quantities available in the plant. Use the single material.

Stock app to receive an overview of a

What is stated in the document flow? ________________________________________________________


253



Unit 7 Solution 33 Transfer Posting for Material

Business Example After you have posted the goods receipt to the blocked stock you check the material. After the inspection and the approval of the quality you want to transfer the material now to unrestricted use stock. You want to use an SAP Fiori app to perform the posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Purchase Order.

Material Qty created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for

1. Transfer the entire quantity of 100 pc of material stock. Use an app for this posting. a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Transfer stock enter 1010.

Transfer Stock

T-R9## in plant 1010 from blocked tile.

view, in the Material field, enter T-R9##, and, in the Plant field

c) Press Enter. 2. Transfer the quantity of 100 pc from blocked stock to unrestricted use stock. a) Select the icon next to the quantity of blocked stock.. The icon becomes blue. b) Select the icon next to the unrestricted use stock (it should be blue). c) On the Transfer stock

view, enter the quantity 100 pc.

d) Choose Post. e) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 3. View the quantities available in the plant. Use the single material.

Stock app to receive an overview of a

What is stated in the document flow? ________________________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Stock tile.

b) On the Stock – Single material

view, in the Material field, enter T-R9##.

c) In the overview, select the storage location line and display the material documents. d) Choose the transfer posting and display the material document and the document flow. e) Write down the stated document flow in the space provided above.

254



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Posting a Goods Receipt for a Purchase Order




255



Unit 7 Lesson 8 Processing Vendor Invoices



Processing Vendor Invoices

256




Unit 7 Exercise 34 Post the Vendor Invoice

Business Example You received the vendors invoice for your purchase order. The FI department posts that invoice now. The invoice has a total amount of 577,50 €, including 52,50 € VAT. To perform the posting the FI department want to use an App as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the PO created in the exercise, Create a New Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management and the GI Posting created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order. 1. Post a vendor’s invoice based on the following data: Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Transaction

Invoice

Invoice Date

Today’s date

Invoicing Party

T-BP##

Posting Date

Today’s date

Reference

TERP10-##

Amount

577,50 EUR

Use the following data for the Item: Field

Value

Tax Code

1I

Item Quantity

100 pc and 10 pc

Use the Value added Tax rate of

52,50.

Write down the document / invoice number:

Invoice number: ______________________________________________ 2. Check that the invoices posted for all Suppliers from an overview and check whether an invoice is blocked.


TERP10 training . Use an app to gain

257



Unit 7 Solution 34 Post the Vendor Invoice

Business Example You received the vendors invoice for your purchase order. The FI department posts that invoice now. The invoice has a total amount of 577,50 €, including 52,50 € VAT. To perform the posting the FI department want to use an App as well. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the PO created in the exercise, Create a New Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management and the GI Posting created in the exercise, Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order. 1. Post a vendor’s invoice based on the following data: Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Transaction

Invoice

Invoice Date

Today’s date

Invoicing Party

T-BP##

Posting Date

Today’s date

Reference

TERP10-##

Amount

577,50 EUR

Use the following data for the Item: Field

Value

Tax Code

1I

Item Quantity

100 pc and 10 pc

Use the Value added Tax rate of

52,50.

Write down the document / invoice number:

Invoice number: ______________________________________________ a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Create Supplier Invoice

258

Create Supplier Invoice

tile.

view, enter the data provided in the table.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Vendor Invoices

c) For the Purchase order reference , enter the PO number from the exercise, Create a New Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management and choose Create Item . d) For the Item , enter the data provided in the second table. e) In the Tax section, in the

Value added Tax

filed, enter 52,50.

f) Choose Simulate and then Post the invoice . g) Write down the document / invoice number in the space provided. 2. Check that the invoices posted for all Suppliers from an overview and check whether an invoice is blocked. a) Open the My purchasing document items

TERP10 training . Use an app to gain

app to check the invoices.

b) Choose Supplier Invoices and select all invoices posted for supplier


TERP10-## .

259



260




Unit 7 Exercise 35 Query the Supplier Account

Business Example After you posted the suppliers invoice you want to check the suppliers account. You want to see the line items posted and the supplier evaluation. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use an app to query the supplier’s account after posting the supplier’s invoice. Use the following values for the Manage Supplier Line Items : Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Supplier

T-BP##

Which Accounts have been posted? Write down the account numbers. Account number

Value

Account 1 Account 2 Account 3 Account 4 2. Find the related documents. Which documents are listed here?


261



Unit 7 Solution 35 Query the Supplier Account

Business Example After you posted the suppliers invoice you want to check the suppliers account. You want to see the line items posted and the supplier evaluation. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use an app to query the supplier’s account after posting the supplier’s invoice. Use the following values for the Manage Supplier Line Items : Field

Value

Company Code

1010

Supplier

T-BP##

Which Accounts have been posted? Write down the account numbers. Account number

Value

Account 1 Account 2 Account 3 Account 4 a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Manage Supplier Line Items

b) In the Manage Supplier Line Items

tile.

view, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Choose Go. d) Choose the invoice that you posted by clicking the document number and go to the fact sheet. e) Write down the account numbers in the table above. f) Go back to the line item overview. g) Open the Manage Journal

entry to verify your account numbers.

The account numbers should be the following:

262



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Vendor Invoices

Account number

Value

Account 1

21100000

Account 2

21120000

Account 3

21120000

Account 4

12600000

2. Find the related documents. Which documents are listed here? a) The following documents should be listed: ●

Incoming Invoice

●

Purchase Order

●

Purchase Requisition

●

Material Document

●

Accounting Document

●

Controlling Document

b) Go back to the Launchpad.


263




264





Unit 7 Lesson 9 Processing the Automatic Payment Run



Payment Process


265



266




Unit 7 Exercise 36 Create an Automatic Payment Run

Business Example The Accounts Payable department (A/P) runs the payment program once a week. The vendor invoice is paid automatically by the payment program at the beginning of the next month — depending on your selection, together with all the other open vendor items. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Create your own payment run in the back-end system T41. Enter the first day of the next month as the run date, and your group, GR##, as the identification. 2. Maintain the payment run parameters so that the payment run selects all documents that have been entered up until the first of next month for your vendor’s account, T-BP##, in company code 1010. Any payments in this run should be made by payment method S (Check) and posted on the first of next month. You must enter the posting date of the next payment run so that the system can decide whether the payment has to be made in this payment run, or whether it can wait until the next payment run. The next payment run is a week after the posting date. Note: You can set up the system to include all vendors in the payment run, and also to specify all payment methods that are used.

Hint: For test purposes, it is advisable to activate the additional log so that any errors can be more easily traced. Activate the additional log for your payment run. 3. Have the system start generating the payment proposal by scheduling the proposal to start immediately. Companies usually schedule the payment proposal to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy (at night, for example). Keep updating the status until a message is displayed telling you that the payment proposal has been created. 4. Accounts payable clerks print out the payment proposal and check that the payments before the actual payment run takes place. This prevents any incorrect payments from being made. If necessary, you can then edit the payment proposal by editing the exception list, removing items from the payment run, or changing payments. Have the system display the payment proposal on the screen.


267



5. After the payment proposal has been checked and accepted as correct, the actual payment run is started, which posts the payments. We also schedule the payment medium creation in this step. Start the payment run by scheduling it to start immediately . Companies usually schedule the payment run in the same way as the payment proposal, to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy. Select the Create payment medium checkbox in the Schedule Payment dialog box to create the payment media with the payment run. 6. Check the cheque, which has been created in the spool.

268




Unit 7 Solution 36 Create an Automatic Payment Run

Business Example The Accounts Payable department (A/P) runs the payment program once a week. The vendor invoice is paid automatically by the payment program at the beginning of the next month — depending on your selection, together with all the other open vendor items. Note that, in this exercise, when a value includes ##, replace the ## characters with the number that your instructor assigned you. 1. Create your own payment run in the back-end system T41. Enter the first day of the next month as the run date, and your group, GR##, as the identification. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Periodic Processing → Payments . Alternatively, enter the transaction code F110. Field Name

Value

Run date

1st of the next month

Identification

GR##

b) Press Enter. The status of the new payment run is:

No parameters entered as yet

.

2. Maintain the payment run parameters so that the payment run selects all documents that have been entered up until the first of next month for your vendor’s account, T-BP##, in company code 1010. Any payments in this run should be made by payment method S (Check) and posted on the first of next month. You must enter the posting date of the next payment run so that the system can decide whether the payment has to be made in this payment run, or whether it can wait until the next payment run. The next payment run is a week after the posting date. Note: You can set up the system to include all vendors in the payment run, and also to specify all payment methods that are used.

Hint: For test purposes, it is advisable to activate the additional log so that any errors can be more easily traced. Activate the additional log for your payment run.


269



a) Select the Parameter

tab and enter the following data:

Field Name

Value

Posting date


Documents entered up to


Company codes

1010

Pmt meths (Payment methods)

S

Next p/date

one week after the posting date

(Next posting date)

T-BP##

Vendor b) Choose Edit → Save Parameters.

c) Select the Additional log tab and enter the following data: Field Name

Value

Due date check

Select

Payment method selection in all cases

Select

Line items of the payment documents

Select

Vendors (from/to)

T-BP##

d) Choose Edit → Save Parameters. e) Go back to the Status tab. 3. Have the system start generating the payment proposal by scheduling the proposal to start immediately. Companies usually schedule the payment proposal to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy (at night, for example). Keep updating the status until a message is displayed telling you that the payment proposal has been created. a) Choose Schedule proposal

(the Proposal button).

b) Choose Start immediately . c) Press Enter. d) Keep updating the status. Press Enter or choose the Status button until the status reads: Payment proposal has been created. 4. Accounts payable clerks print out the payment proposal and check that the payments before the actual payment run takes place. This prevents any incorrect payments from being made. If necessary, you can then edit the payment proposal by editing the exception list, removing items from the payment run, or changing payments. Have the system display the payment proposal on the screen. a) Choose the Display proposal button. b) You should see an outgoing payment

270



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run

Hint: If no payments are displayed on the screen, or only the exception list is displayed, you have made an error somewhere. Look at the proposal log from the initial screen by choosing Display proposal log to see if you can find the error. Delete the payment proposal ( Edit → Proposal → Delete ) and remove the error. Then restart the payment proposal. Repeat this process until payments are displayed in the proposal. c) Switch to the Status tab. 5. After the payment proposal has been checked and accepted as correct, the actual payment run is started, which posts the payments. We also schedule the payment medium creation in this step. Start the payment run by scheduling it to start immediately . Companies usually schedule the payment run in the same way as the payment proposal, to be processed in the background at times when the system is less busy. Select the Create payment medium checkbox in the Schedule Payment dialog box to create the payment media with the payment run. a) Choose Payment run (using F7 or the

Schedule payment

button).

b) Select Start immediately . c) Select Create payment medium

.

d) Press Enter. e) Keep updating the status. Press Enter or choose the Status button until the status displays that the payment run has been carried out and posting orders have been generated and completed. 6. Check the cheque, which has been created in the spool. a) Choose Spool → Cheque → Display . b) Leave the transaction.


271



272




Unit 7 Exercise 37 View Vendor Accounts

Business Example You want to check whether the balance of the vendor’s account is 0 and the open item has been cleared. 1. Check whether the automatic payment run has cleared the original open item. Drill down from the balance of the vendor's account to the payment document. View the complete payment document with the Document Overview icon.


273



Unit 7 Solution 37 View Vendor Accounts

Business Example You want to check whether the balance of the vendor’s account is 0 and the open item has been cleared. 1. Check whether the automatic payment run has cleared the original open item. Drill down from the balance of the vendor's account to the payment document. View the complete payment document with the Document Overview icon. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Account → Display Balances . Alternatively, enter the transaction code FK10N. Field Name

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Company code

1010

Fiscal year

current year

b) Choose Execute . c) Drill down on the balance column of the next month. The original open item has now been cleared and a payment item (document type ZP) has been created. Drill down on the document and select the call up document overview icon to see the complete transaction. d) Return to the

274

SAP Easy Access screen.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing the Automatic Payment Run




275



276




UNIT 8

Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA

279

Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

280

Exercise 38: Change a Material Master Record

281

Exercise 39: Change Bill of Material

285

Exercise 40: Change a Work Center

287

Exercise 41: Change the Routing for a Finished Product

289

Lesson 3 Creating a Product Cost Estimate Exercise 42: Create a Standard Cost Estimate

292 293

Exercise 43: Update Material Valuation

295

Lesson 4 Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning

300

Exercise 44: Manage Planned Independent Requirements

301

Lesson 5 Defining the MRP Process

306

Exercise 45: Display the Material Master Record

307

Lesson 6 Processing MRP Exercise 46: Process an MRP Run

312 313

Exercise 47: Monitor Material Coverage

317

Lesson 7 Describing the Manufacturing Business Process

321

Lesson 8 Creating and Releasing a Production Order

322

Exercise 48: Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order


323

277


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 8: Plan to Produce Business Process in SAP S/4HANA

Exercise 49: Release a Production Order

327

Lesson 9 Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order Exercise 50: Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

332 333

Lesson 10 Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt Exercise 51: Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

339 341

Lesson 11 Performing Period End Closing Activities

345

Exercise 52: Calculate Variances in a Production Order

347

Exercise 53: Settle a Production Order

349

Exercise 54: Evaluate CO-PA

351

UNIT OBJECTIVES

278

●

Describe the plan to produce process in SAP S/4HANA

●

Explain the master data need in plan to produce process

●

Create a product cost estimate

●

Plan product demand

●

Define the MRP process

●

Process MRP

●

Describe the steps involved in the manufacturing business process

●

Convert a planned order into production order

●

Explain production order release

●

Perform a material withdrawal for a production order

●

Perform an order confirmation and a materials goods receipt

●

Perform period end closing activities for production order




Unit 8 Lesson 1 Describing the Plan to Produce Process in SAP S/4HANA



Plan to Produce Business Process LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



279



Unit 8 Lesson 2 Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process



Material Master Data Record Bill of Material Work Centers Routings Production Versions

280




Unit 8 Exercise 38 Change a Material Master Record

Business Example The engineering department tried the new lock in one of your bicycles and decided to use this in the future. As the person responsible for planning, you need to extend the material master of your lock, to fulfill the requirements for materials planning. Therefore, you need to maintain the relevant views for material requirements planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. You want to extend the material master record T-R9## for the use in materials planning. The material should be planned automatically by MRP in plant 1010. As the responsible person you need to create the necessary data. The material should be planned based upon the real requirements in the system. The responsible person for planning is 0##. 1. Extend the material master record

T-R9## for the use in materials planning.

2. Create the MRP1, MRP2 , and MRP3 view for Plant 1010 . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views: MRP1

The material should be planned by Forecast consumption, no planning time fence. The responsible person for planning is MRP Controller The lock should be reordered by a fixed quantity of 500 pc every time.

MRP2

The production storage location is 101C. The planned delivery time for this material is 2 days. The time buffers should be 0 days for all floats. A safety stock of 200 pc should be considered.

MRP3

The availability check should be based on daily requirements. A preplanning of the lock is not necessary.


0## .

281



Unit 8 Solution 38 Change a Material Master Record

Business Example The engineering department tried the new lock in one of your bicycles and decided to use this in the future. As the person responsible for planning, you need to extend the material master of your lock, to fulfill the requirements for materials planning. Therefore, you need to maintain the relevant views for material requirements planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. You want to extend the material master record T-R9## for the use in materials planning. The material should be planned automatically by MRP in plant 1010. As the responsible person you need to create the necessary data. The material should be planned based upon the real requirements in the system. The responsible person for planning is 0##. 1. Extend the material master record a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-R9## for the use in materials planning. Create Material tile.

b) On the Create material (initial screen)

, in the Material field, enter T-R9##.

c) Press Enter. 2. Create the MRP1, MRP2 , and MRP3 view for Plant 1010 . a) On the Select Views screen, select the following views: MRP 1 MRP 2 MRP 3 b) Choose Continue . c) In the Organizational Level dialog box, enter the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Stor. Location

101C

d) Choose Continue . 3. Enter the following data in the specified views:

282



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process

MRP1

The material should be planned by Forecast consumption, no planning time fence. The responsible person for planning is MRP Controller The lock should be reordered by a fixed quantity of 500 pc every time.

MRP2

The production storage location is 101C. The planned delivery time for this material is 2 days. The time buffers should be 0 days for all floats. A safety stock of 200 pc should be considered.

MRP3

The availability check should be based on daily requirements. A preplanning of the lock is not necessary.

0## .

a) On the MRP 1 data view, enter the following information: Field

Value

MRP Type

PD

MRP Controller

0##

Lot size

FX

Fixed lot size

500

b) On the MRP 2 data view, maintain the following data: Field

Value

Production storage Location

101C

Planned del. Time

2

SchedMargin Key

000

Safety stock

200

c) On the MRP 3 tab, in the Availability check field, enter 01. d) Press Enter and save the Master Record.


283



284




Unit 8 Exercise 39 Change Bill of Material

Business Example After the material master has been extended for materials planning, the engineering department needs to change the BOM of the bicycle. The new material needs to be included in the structure of the bicycle, to use the lock in the future in production of the bicycles. Therefore, you change the existing BOM for the existing bicycle (finished good) in plant 1010. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. 1. Change the existing BOM for the bicycle T-F1## . Include the new material, T-R9## in the BOM of plant 1010 with a quantity of 1 pc. Included the material as a stock material.


285



Unit 8 Solution 39 Change Bill of Material

Business Example After the material master has been extended for materials planning, the engineering department needs to change the BOM of the bicycle. The new material needs to be included in the structure of the bicycle, to use the lock in the future in production of the bicycles. Therefore, you change the existing BOM for the existing bicycle (finished good) in plant 1010. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Material Master, created in the exercise, Create and Extend a Vendor Master Record. 1. Change the existing BOM for the bicycle T-F1## . Include the new material, T-R9## in the BOM of plant 1010 with a quantity of 1 pc. Included the material as a stock material. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Change Bill of Material tile.

b) On the Change Material BOM: Initial screen

, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

1

c) Press Enter. d) On the Change Material BOM: General item overview , to include the material the structure, enter the following data in the next available line for the item: Field

Value

ItemCat

L

Component

T-R9##

T-R9## in

e) Press Enter. f) In the Detail data of the item, enter the quantity of

1 pc.

g) Save your changes.

286




Unit 8 Exercise 40 Change a Work Center

Business Example You have hired a new employee for the assembly of the bicycle. This employee, who you hired in the Unit, Human Capital Management, needs to be included in the existing work center A## for the assembly of the bicycle.

T-

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position. 1. Change the existing work center Organizational Unit.


T-A## in plant 1010 to include the PROD-##

287



Unit 8 Solution 40 Change a Work Center

Business Example You have hired a new employee for the assembly of the bicycle. This employee, who you hired in the Unit, Human Capital Management, needs to be included in the existing work center A## for the assembly of the bicycle.

T-

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position. 1. Change the existing work center Organizational Unit. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-A## in plant 1010 to include the PROD-## Change Bill of Material tile.

b) On the Change Work Center: Initial screen


Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

c) Press Enter. d) On the Change Work Center: Basic Data

tab, choose the

HRMS icon.

e) On the Change Work Center: Assignment to HR Organizational entity Organizational Unit entry.

screen, select the

f) Search for the organizational unit that you created for production, or enter the Organizational Unit, PROD-## , directly. g) Press Enter. h) Go back to the maintenance of the work center. i) Save your changes.

288




Unit 8 Exercise 41 Change the Routing for a Finished Product

Business Example After you have changed the work center to include the new employee, you need to adjust the routing as well. You now need an extra 5 minutes labor time more for the assembly of the bicycle because the lock must be added. In addition, the new material that you included in the BOM should be used in the first operation as well as all the others. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Change the routing and extend the first operation by 5 min of labor time for the bicycle F1## . 2. Assign all of the material to the beginning of the first operation, using (F7).


T-

CompAllocation

289



Unit 8 Solution 41 Change the Routing for a Finished Product

Business Example After you have changed the work center to include the new employee, you need to adjust the routing as well. You now need an extra 5 minutes labor time more for the assembly of the bicycle because the lock must be added. In addition, the new material that you included in the BOM should be used in the first operation as well as all the others. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Change the routing and extend the first operation by 5 min of labor time for the bicycle F1## . a) On the Launchpad, choose the

T-

Change Routing tile.

b) On the Change Routing: Initial screen


Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

c) On the Change Routing: Operation Overview , to add 5 min for labor time to the existing 10 min in the first operation, in the Labor field, enter 15. 2. Assign all of the material to the beginning of the first operation, using (F7).

CompAllocation

a) On the right side of the menu bar, choose the ellipsis button. b) Choose CompAllocation (F7). c) Choose all the Items and, again on the right side of the menu bar, choose the ellipsis button. d) In the dialog box, enter

10 (operation).

e) Press Enter. f) Save your changes.

290



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the Master Data in the Plan to Produce Process




291



Unit 8 Lesson 3 Creating a Product Cost Estimate



CO-PC Components Product Cost Planning

292




Unit 8 Exercise 42 Create a Standard Cost Estimate

Business Example Now that you have changed the BOM and the routing you need to calculate the cost for your finished product T-F1## again. You run a standard cost estimate to calculate the costs of good manufactured and the costs of goods sold. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task. you will log on to the back-end system and use transactional processes. 1. Run a standard cost estimate for your finished product and save it. Perform this task using a transaction. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Costing Variant

PPC1

Costing Lot Size

100

Costing Date from

Today


293



Unit 8 Solution 42 Create a Standard Cost Estimate

Business Example Now that you have changed the BOM and the routing you need to calculate the cost for your finished product T-F1## again. You run a standard cost estimate to calculate the costs of good manufactured and the costs of goods sold. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task. you will log on to the back-end system and use transactional processes. 1. Run a standard cost estimate for your finished product and save it. Perform this task using a transaction. Use the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Costing Variant

PPC1

Costing Lot Size

100

Costing Date from

Today

a) On the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Accounting → Controlling → Product Cost Controlling → Product Cost Planning → Material Costing → Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code CK11N. b) On the Initial screen of Create Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure following values provided in the table for the Material and Plant fields. c) On the Costing tab, enter the values provided in the table for the Costing Lot Size fields. d) Choose the Dates and, choose the field, enter today’s date.

, enter the

Costing Variant and

Default value icon and, in the Costing Date from

e) Press Enter. f) Check whether the lock has been included in the calculation. g) Save the data.

294




Unit 8 Exercise 43 Update Material Valuation

Business Example You created a new standard cost estimate. The new calculated costs need to be transferred to the material master record. You will update the material price in the accounting view of the material master record. You will use a transaction for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Select the material for update. Field

Value

Posting Period / Year

Actual month / Actual Year

Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

2. Open a second session and review the material master. What is the future price for the material?

3. Update the material valuation price in the material master of your finished product TTF1## and release the cost estimate. Use the following data: Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit


295



Has the standard price been updated?

296




Unit 8 Solution 43 Update Material Valuation

Business Example You created a new standard cost estimate. The new calculated costs need to be transferred to the material master record. You will update the material price in the accounting view of the material master record. You will use a transaction for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Select the material for update. Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Controlling → Product Cost Controlling → Product Cost Planning → Material Costing → Price Update → . Alternatively, use transaction code CK11N. b) In the Initial screen of table.

Price Update: Mark Standard Price

enter the data provided in the

c) Choose Execute . 2. Open a second session and review the material master. a) Use transaction

MM03 to go directly to the material master record of T-F1##.

b) In the initial screen of

Display material master

, enter your material number.

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Costing 2 tab. e) Enter the Plant


1010 and press Enter again.

297



What is the future price for the material? The future price is 63,.28 € 3. Update the material valuation price in the material master of your finished product TTF1## and release the cost estimate. Use the following data: Field

Value



Company Code

1010

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

Test Run

Delimit

a) Go to the Price Update session. b) In the transaction

Price Update transaction, choose the

c) In the Initial screen of the table.

Price Update: Release Standard Price

Release icon. enter the data provided in

d) Choose Execute . e) Go to the Display Material Master

session.

f) Exit the current material master and start the transaction again. g) In the initial screen of

Display material master

, enter your material number.

h) Press Enter. i) Choose the Costing 2 tab. j) Enter the Plant

1010 and press Enter again.

k) Leave both transactions. Has the standard price been updated? Yes the future price has been transferred to the current price and as well to the standard price.

298



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Product Cost Estimate




299



Unit 8 Lesson 4 Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning


Plan product demand

Planning Product Demand

300




Unit 8 Exercise 44 Manage Planned Independent Requirements

Business Example Now that you changed the structure of your bicycle, you need to rebuild the existing production plan. Therefore, you want to gain an overview about the current production situation for the material T-F1## . Afterwards, you will rearrange the existing production plan for material T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master Record.

Material Master , created in the exercise, Create and Extend a

The PID created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Check the current situation for the bicycle T-F1##. Note: When using the Monitor Material Coverage for the first time, a dialog box appears, where you need to enter your MRP Controller. Choose the MRP Controller 0## in plant 1010.

How much of the material is available in Stock?

How much of the material is already planned?

2. Because there are no requirements in the system, create a production plan for the next 10 weeks. Use the following quantities for the next 10 weeks starting from the following week: W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

3. Check the situation again.


301



Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first four planned independent requirements: Requirement

MRP element

Date

Quantity

1 2 3 4

What kind of MRP elements have been created for the Planned independent requirements?

What is the current situation for the material

302

T-F1## ?




Unit 8 Solution 44 Manage Planned Independent Requirements

Business Example Now that you changed the structure of your bicycle, you need to rebuild the existing production plan. Therefore, you want to gain an overview about the current production situation for the material T-F1## . Afterwards, you will rearrange the existing production plan for material T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor Master Record.

Material Master , created in the exercise, Create and Extend a

The PID created in this exercise is required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. 1. Check the current situation for the bicycle T-F1##. Note: When using the Monitor Material Coverage for the first time, a dialog box appears, where you need to enter your MRP Controller. Choose the MRP Controller 0## in plant 1010. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Monitor Material Coverage

b) In the dialog box, enter the MRP Controller c) Click the material

tile.

0# in plant 1010 .

Stock Availability and choose

Check Material Coverage

.

How much of the material is available in Stock?

How much of the material is already planned?

2. Because there are no requirements in the system, create a production plan for the next 10 weeks. Use the following quantities for the next 10 weeks starting from the following week: W+1


W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

303



25

25

25

25


25

25

25

25

25

25

Manage PIR tile.

b) On the Manage PIR Material list , select the material

T-F1## and click the line.

c) In the Draft PIR column, enter the values provided in the table. d) Choose the Release PIR button e) Go back to the Manage PIR screen. 3. Check the situation again. Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first four planned independent requirements: Requirement

MRP element

Date

Quantity

1 2 3 4 a) On the Launchpad, choose the


tile.

The Stock Availability should be in red. b) Click the Stock Availability foe material R-F1##. and choose

Check Material Coverage

.

c) Write down the requirement dates and the quantities for the first 4 planned independent requirements in the spaces provided in the table. d) Go back to the Launchpad. What kind of MRP elements have been created for the Planned independent requirements?

What is the current situation for the material

304

T-F1## ?



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Planning Product Demand - Integrated Planning


Plan product demand


305



Unit 8 Lesson 5 Defining the MRP Process



The MRP Process

306




Unit 8 Exercise 45 Display the Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To Gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle, T-F1## , to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling data and the Accounting data. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

2. Review whether the planning strategy is maintained correctly in the finished product by checking the material master for the bicycle T-F1## . Look at the MRP3 data, where you find the information from the perspective of preplanning. Check whether the planning with final assembly is maintained and note the Consumption mode , as well as the consumption periods. In the Forecast requirements section, which values are maintained for the the Consumption Mode and the consumption periods? Write down the values: Field

Strategy Group ,

Value

Strategy Group Consumption Mode Bwd. Consumption per. Fwd. Consumption per.


307



What is the impact of these settings for the finished product? Write down an explanation.

308




Unit 8 Solution 45 Display the Material Master Record

Business Example You want to gain an overview what kind of information is stored in a material master record. You will check the material master for the bicycle and see how a material master data record is structured. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To Gain a first overview about the structure of a material master record, check the material master for the bicycle, T-F1## , to be produced. Check the Basic Data, the Sales Data, the Work Scheduling data and the Accounting data. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material number

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of

Display Material tile.

Display Material , in the Material field, enter T-F1##.

c) Press Enter. d) In the dialog box, select the following views: 2. Review whether the planning strategy is maintained correctly in the finished product by checking the material master for the bicycle T-F1## . Look at the MRP3 data, where you find the information from the perspective of preplanning. Check whether the planning with final assembly is maintained and note the Consumption mode , as well as the consumption periods. a) To select the views relevant for the preplanning of the material, in the dialog box, select the MRP 3 view, and press Enter. b) In the Organizational Levels

Select View

dialog box, in the Plant field, enter your plant

1010.

c) Press Enter. d) Look at the Forecast requirements section, and write down the values that are maintained for the Strategy Group , the Consumption Mode , and the consumption periods.


309



In the Forecast requirements section, which values are maintained for the the Consumption Mode and the consumption periods? Write down the values: Field

Strategy Group ,

Value

Strategy Group Consumption Mode Bwd. Consumption per. Fwd. Consumption per.

What is the impact of these settings for the finished product? Write down an explanation.

310



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Defining the MRP Process




311



Unit 8 Lesson 6 Processing MRP


Process MRP

Processing MRP

312




Unit 8 Exercise 46 Process an MRP Run

Business Example After the changes to the planned independent requirements you need to schedule a MRP run. The MRP run should be done upon the finished product and include all components including your new lock. The MRP run should be a regenerative run and should be scheduled immediately. After the MRP run you check the log and see whether the requirements are fulfilled and the problems solved. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Run an MRP run. Schedule it to run immediately as a regenerative run. include all BOM components during the run. The MRP run should NOT be repeated daily. Only plan your material for the finished product T-F1## in plant 1010. Name the Job with your user TS410-##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Job Template

Material Requirements Planning (Default)

Job Description

TS410-##

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

BOM Components

Selected

Regenerative run

Selected

Planning Mode

3

Start immediately

Selected

2. Check the log of the MRP run. Use the

Display MRP Key Figures app.

How many materials have been planned?


313



Unit 8 Solution 46 Process an MRP Run

Business Example After the changes to the planned independent requirements you need to schedule a MRP run. The MRP run should be done upon the finished product and include all components including your new lock. The MRP run should be a regenerative run and should be scheduled immediately. After the MRP run you check the log and see whether the requirements are fulfilled and the problems solved. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Run an MRP run. Schedule it to run immediately as a regenerative run. include all BOM components during the run. The MRP run should NOT be repeated daily. Only plan your material for the finished product T-F1## in plant 1010. Name the Job with your user TS410-##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Job Template

Material Requirements Planning (Default)

Job Description

TS410-##

Plant

1010

Material

T-F1##

BOM Components

Selected

Regenerative run

Selected

Planning Mode

3

Start immediately

Selected


Schedule MRP Runs

b) In the overview of the scheduled jobs, choose the

tile. New icon.

c) On the Initial Screen New Job Material Requirements planning: Initial screen, in the Details section, enter the values provided in the table for Job Template and Job Description . d) In the Planning Scope section, enter the values provided in the table for Material . e) In the Also section, select the

314

Job

Plant and

BOM Components checkbox.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing MRP

f) In the Control Parameters section, select the Planning Mode field, enter 3. g) In the Scheduling Information

Regenerative run

section, select the

h) Choose Edit Scheduling and deselect the

checkbox, and, in the

Start immediately

checkbox.

Recurrence checkbox.

i) Choose OK. You are back in the definition of the new job. j) Choose Schedule . You are back in the

Job Overview .

k) In the Job Overview , press Go until the status changes to

Finished .

l) Choose Log Information . m) Leave the application and go back to the Launchpad. 2. Check the log of the MRP run. Use the a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Display MRP Key Figures app. Display MRP Figures tile.

b) In Display MRP Key Figures , select your MRP run and display the detailed information. c) Choose your entry. d) Note how many materials have been planned. e) Go back to the Launchpad. How many materials have been planned?


315



316




Unit 8 Exercise 47 Monitor Material Coverage

Business Example After the MRP run, you want to check the result and the procurement proposals. You need to check whether planned orders have been created for your finished product and whether purchase requisitions have been created for the lock. For the finished product (T-F1##) you want to use the Monitor Material Coverage lock (T-R9##) you want to use the “old” stock / requirement list.

app. For the

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check whether all of the requirements for the finished product been fulfilled. Write down the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements Date

MRP Element

Quantity

2. Check the proposals for the lock (Material T-R9##) using the “old” stock requirement list. Use the following information, Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Plant

1010

What has happened to your lock?

3. Are there purchase requisitions to fulfill the requirements for the lock? Write down the MRP element data for the purchase requisitions. Date

MRP Element

Quantity

4. Go back to the Launchpad.


317



Unit 8 Solution 47 Monitor Material Coverage

Business Example After the MRP run, you want to check the result and the procurement proposals. You need to check whether planned orders have been created for your finished product and whether purchase requisitions have been created for the lock. For the finished product (T-F1##) you want to use the Monitor Material Coverage lock (T-R9##) you want to use the “old” stock / requirement list.

app. For the

Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check whether all of the requirements for the finished product been fulfilled. Write down the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements a) To check the proposal for the finished product on the Launchpad, choose the Material Coverage tile. b) In the material list, select the material T-F1## and choose

Monitor

Manage Materials .

c) Enter the first four planned orders that have been created to fulfill the planned independent requirements in the table.. d) When all your requirements are fulfilled, go back to the Launchpad. Date

MRP Element

Quantity

2. Check the proposals for the lock (Material T-R9##) using the “old” stock requirement list. Use the following information, Field

Value

Material

T-R9##

Plant

1010


Monitor Stock / Requirements List

b) In the Stock / Requirement Lis: Initial

tile.

screen, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter.

318



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing MRP

What has happened to your lock? [Correct answer] 3. Are there purchase requisitions to fulfill the requirements for the lock? Write down the MRP element data for the purchase requisitions. Date

MRP Element

Quantity

4. Go back to the Launchpad.


319




320

Process MRP




Unit 8 Lesson 7 Describing the Manufacturing Business Process



Production Order Processing Overview LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



321



Unit 8 Lesson 8 Creating and Releasing a Production Order



●


Planned Order to Production Order

322




Unit 8 Exercise 48 Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order

Business Example You need to initiate production for the bicycles (T-F1##). You will convert a planned order into a production order to start the production. Once the production order is created, you will look at the production order and the information given there in detail. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Convert the first planned order in a production order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Planning Plant

1010

MRP Controller

0##

Material

T-F1##

Note the production order number. Production order number: ________________________________________ 2. Check whether the production order is visible in the Material Coverage Monitor. What is the system status of the order?

3. How many operations are contained in the order?

4. Which components are included in the order?

5. Exit the application and go back to the Launchpad.


323



Unit 8 Solution 48 Convert a Planned Order to a Production Order

Business Example You need to initiate production for the bicycles (T-F1##). You will convert a planned order into a production order to start the production. Once the production order is created, you will look at the production order and the information given there in detail. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Convert the first planned order in a production order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Planning Plant

1010

MRP Controller

0##

Material

T-F1##

Note the production order number. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Convert Orders to Production Orders

b) On the Collective Conversion of Planned Orders: Initial Screen in the table.

tile.


c) Choose Execute . d) In the list, select the first planned order and choose

Convert .

e) Write down the Production order number. f) Exit the application. Production order number: ________________________________________ 2. Check whether the production order is visible in the Material Coverage Monitor. a) Choose the Monitor Material Coverage b) In the Monitor Material Coverage Materials .

tile.

app, select the Material

T-F1## and choose

Manage

c) Click the Production order. d) In the following view, choose e) In the fact sheet, click

324

Open → Fact Sheet .

System Status

.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating and Releasing a Production Order

What is the system status of the order? There should be 4 Status active: CRTD, PRC, SETC, MANC. 3. How many operations are contained in the order? There should be 3 operations. a) To see how many operations are contained in the order, go back to the fact sheet overview and click Operations . 4. Which components are included in the order? There should be 4 Materials in the order: Material 1(T-S1##), Material 2 (T-S2##), Material 3 (T-R1##), and Material 4 T-R9## 5. Exit the application and go back to the Launchpad.


325



Production Order Release

326




Unit 8 Exercise 49 Release a Production Order

Business Example Now you need to release the production orders to start producing the bicycles T-F1##Therefore you need a list that shows you the production orders in the future. First, you will create a variant that can be reused every time. Next, you will release your first production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task you, need to log on to the back-end system first and, in the back-end system, use transaction codes RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT and RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER. 1. Add the transaction codes

RPSPOR1 and RPSPOR2 to you Favorites.

2. Create a variant for the release of your material T-F1## to select the production orders for your material T-F1##. Name the variant TERP10_##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to

120

Material

T-F1##

MRP Controller

0##

Variant name

TERP10_##

Description

Bicycle T-F1##

3. Assign Variant TERP10_## to your user. Use the following information: Field

Value

User

TS410-##

Variant

TERP10_##

Variant Position

1

Number of Orders

Display always


327



4. Release your first production order for material T-F1## using the Orders app.

328

Release Production




Unit 8 Solution 49 Release a Production Order

Business Example Now you need to release the production orders to start producing the bicycles T-F1##Therefore you need a list that shows you the production orders in the future. First, you will create a variant that can be reused every time. Next, you will release your first production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. To perform this task you, need to log on to the back-end system first and, in the back-end system, use transaction codes RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT and RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER. 1. Add the transaction codes

RPSPOR1 and RPSPOR2 to you Favorites.

a) On the SAP Logon screen, choose the

T41 S/4 HANA system.

b) Log on with your user TS410-## and your password. c) Right-click Favorites , and choose d) In the Transaction code

Insert Transaction

field, enter the

e) Repeat steps c) and d) for transaction code

.

RPSPOR1 RPSPOR2.

2. Create a variant for the release of your material T-F1## to select the production orders for your material T-F1##. Name the variant TERP10_##. Use the following information: Field

Value

Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to

120

Material

T-F1##

MRP Controller

0##

Variant name

TERP10_##

Description

Bicycle T-F1##

a) Choose transaction code b) On the entry screen for provided in the table for


RPSPOR1 – CREATE VARIANT from your Favorites. Create Variant for Production order selection , enter the values Rel. Schedule Rel. Date to , Material , and MRP Controller .

329



c) Save the variant. d) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. e) In the Screen Variant and Description .

attributes, enter the values provided in the table for

Variant name

f) Save the variant. g) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. 3. Assign Variant TERP10_## to your user. Use the following information: Field

Value

User

TS410-##

Variant

TERP10_##

Variant Position

1

Number of Orders

Display always

a) Choose transaction code

RPSPOR2 ASSIGN VARIANT TO USER from your Favorites.

b) On the C hange view “Assign Variant for Production Order Selection for User” enter the data provided in the table and choose Save .

screen,

c) Exit the back-end system. 4. Release your first production order for material T-F1## using the Orders app. a) In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, choose the b) In the Release Production Order List Check availability button.

Release Production

Release Production Orders

tile.

, choose your production order and choose the

c) Confirm the message. d) Select your production order and choose the

Release button.

Now the production order should be delimited from your list. e) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

330



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating and Releasing a Production Order



●



331



Unit 8 Lesson 9 Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order



Material Withdrawal

332




Unit 8 Exercise 50 Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

Business Example After you released your production order, you want to check the status of the production order. Therefore, you will review the production order. Next you need to post the goods issue for the production order to start with your production of the bicycle T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Production Order for Material T-F1## After you released your production order you want to review the production order for material T-F1##. 1. Review the production order for material T-F1## using the

Monitor Production Order

app.

Write down the Start and the Finish Date for the order: Field

Value

Start Date Finish Date Write the Costing Variant Plan

and Reservation / PReq

Field

values:

Value

Costing Variant Plan Reservation / PReq

What is the meaning of Reservation / Preq immediately?

W Post Goods Issue to Production Order The material for the production order needs to be issued from the warehouse to production. Therefore you will post the goods issue for the production order. As you realize during the check of the materials that one lock is broken, you ask for one lock with material T-R9## more during goods issue posting. After the posting you review the accounting documents generated. Use the Post Goods Movement tile for this.


333



1. Post the goods issue for the production order using the Post Goods Movement tile. choose the Executable Action type Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. Increase the quantity for Material T-R9## to 11. 2. Review the posting and check the accounting documents. What documents have been created and why?

What postings have been made in financial accounting?

334




Unit 8 Solution 50 Perform Goods Issue for a Production Order

Business Example After you released your production order, you want to check the status of the production order. Therefore, you will review the production order. Next you need to post the goods issue for the production order to start with your production of the bicycle T-F1##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Production Order for Material T-F1## After you released your production order you want to review the production order for material T-F1##. 1. Review the production order for material T-F1## using the a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Monitor Production Order

Monitor Production Orders

app.

tile.

b) On the Initial screen of Production Order List , select your Production Order and choose the Manage Orders button. c) In the Stock / Requirement List

, choose Milestones .

d) Check the dates for the order. e) Go back to the Stock / Requirements List f) In the Stock / Requirement List

.

, choose your Production order number. .

g) Choose Open → Production Order. h) In the Display Production Order

, enter your Order number and press Enter.

i) In the Production order, go to the Reservation / PReq values.

Control tab and check the

Costing Variant Plan

and

j) Go back to the SAP Fiori Launchpad. Write down the Start and the Finish Date for the order: Field

Value

Start Date Finish Date Write the Costing Variant Plan


and Reservation / PReq

values:

335



Field

Value

Costing Variant Plan Reservation / PReq

What is the meaning of Reservation / Preq immediately? Immediately means that the reservations are due to materials planning when the order is created. The purchase requisitions will be created when the order is in system status released as well. W Post Goods Issue to Production Order The material for the production order needs to be issued from the warehouse to production. Therefore you will post the goods issue for the production order. As you realize during the check of the materials that one lock is broken, you ask for one lock with material T-R9## more during goods issue posting. After the posting you review the accounting documents generated. Use the Post Goods Movement tile for this. 1. Post the goods issue for the production order using the Post Goods Movement tile. choose the Executable Action type Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. Increase the quantity for Material T-R9## to 11. a) On the Launchpad, choose the

Post Goods Movement

tile.

b) In the Initial screen of Post Goods Issue Order , choose the Goods Issue and Reference Document of type Order. c) In Reference Document

field, enter your production order number and press Enter.

d) In the Material Overview , enter the Quantity of e) Mark all the material as

Executable Action type

OK and choose

11 pc for the Material T-R9##

Post .

f) Stay in the transaction for the next task. 2. Review the posting and check the accounting documents. a) In the Post Goods Movement

app, choose

Display → Material Document .

b) Press Enter. c) To see what documents have been created, go to

Doc. Info and choose

FI Documents .

d) Click the FI document and note the postings. Name each G/L account posted only once. e) Exit the Transaction and go back to the Launchpad.

336



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing Material Withdrawal for a Production Order

What documents have been created and why? The Controlling Document has been created due to the consumption of materials for the production order. The FI document has been created due to stock change and consumption. The material ledger document has been created due to the Material Ledger active in SAP S/4HANA. What postings have been made in financial accounting? There should be the following accounts: Account 13300000: Inventory Semi Finished, Account 54300000: Inv. Change SEMI Finished, Account 13100000: Inventory RAW mat, and Account 51100000: Consumpt. RAW


337




338





Unit 8 Lesson 10 Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt



Order Confirmation Goods Receipt Posting Quality Management Integration


339



340




Unit 8 Exercise 51 Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

Business Example The materials have been withdrawn for the production order and the production has been finished now. You need to confirm the production order and post the goods receipt for the bicycle T-F1## to stock. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use the application Confirm Production Order app to confirm the operations for your production order. – Enter time ticket for production order – to confirm the times worked. When you confirm the last operation, the goods receipt will be posted automatically to the production order. Use the following data, using the relevant Operation number (10, 20, or 30): Field

Value

Order

Your Production order number

Operation

10, 20, or 30 as appropriate

Confirmation Type

Final Confirmation

Yield

The full order quantity of your order

Set up Time

Your choice

Processing Time

Your choice

2. Check availability of your bicycle, T-F1##, using the


tile.

Is there stock available? Available stock:__________________________________


341



Unit 8 Solution 51 Confirm a Production Order and Post Goods Receipt

Business Example The materials have been withdrawn for the production order and the production has been finished now. You need to confirm the production order and post the goods receipt for the bicycle T-F1## to stock. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Use the application Confirm Production Order app to confirm the operations for your production order. – Enter time ticket for production order – to confirm the times worked. When you confirm the last operation, the goods receipt will be posted automatically to the production order. Use the following data, using the relevant Operation number (10, 20, or 30): Field

Value

Order


Operation

10, 20, or 30 as appropriate

Confirmation Type

Final Confirmation

Yield

The full order quantity of your order

Set up Time

Your choice

Processing Time

Your choice

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Initial screen of in the table.

Confirm Production Order

Enter Time ticket for production order

tile. , enter the data provided

c) Save the confirmation. d) Repeat the steps b) and c), replacing the operation with 20. e) Repeat the steps b) and c), replacing the operation with 30. When you confirm the operation 30, the goods receipt posting is done automatically. f) Go back to the Launchpad. 2. Check availability of your bicycle, T-F1##, using the

342


tile.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing an Order Confirmation and a Materials Goods Receipt



b) On the Initial screen of Monitor Material Coverage choose Manage Materials .

tile.

, select the material

T-F1## and

c) Note the available stock for your product T-F1##: d) Go back to the Launchpad. Is there stock available? Available stock:__________________________________


343




344





Unit 8 Lesson 11 Performing Period End Closing Activities



Variance Calculation Production Order Settement of Production Orders Additional Activities CO-PA Integration


345



346




Unit 8 Exercise 52 Calculate Variances in a Production Order

Business Example It is period end. You need to perform a variance calculation for your production order. This is a necessary step before settlement of the order. You want to see the impact of variance calculation for the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Calculate the variances for the production order. Use the Controlling Area

A000 and the following information:

Field

Value

Order

Your Order number

Period

Current Period

Test run

Not selected

Which Cost elements show variances and what is the value? Cost element


Variance

347



Unit 8 Solution 52 Calculate Variances in a Production Order

Business Example It is period end. You need to perform a variance calculation for your production order. This is a necessary step before settlement of the order. You want to see the impact of variance calculation for the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Calculate the variances for the production order. Use the Controlling Area

A000 and the following information:

Field

Value

Order

Your Order number

Period

Current Period

Test run

Not selected


Calculate Variance per orde

b) In the dialog box that appears, enter Controlling Area c) On the Initial screen of

Variance calculation

r tile.

A000.


d) Choose Execute . e) In the Variance Calculation: List , choose the elements show variances and their values

Cost element button and note which Cost

f) Leave the transaction. g) Go back to the Launchpad. Which Cost elements show variances and what is the value? Cost element

348

Variance




Unit 8 Exercise 53 Settle a Production Order

Business Example After the variance calculation you need to perform another activity from the period end closing procedures. You must settle the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the production order using an SAP Fiori app. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order


Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Not selected


349



Unit 8 Solution 53 Settle a Production Order

Business Example After the variance calculation you need to perform another activity from the period end closing procedures. You must settle the production order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the production order using an SAP Fiori app. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order


Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Not selected

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) In the Initial screen of

Single Order Settlement

Actual settlement: Order

tile.


c) Choose Execute . The costs should have been settled. Where have the costs been settled to? The costs should have been settled to the material and the profitability analysis.

350




Unit 8 Exercise 54 Evaluate CO-PA

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Costing-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment – → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

Controlling . Choose

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1xx in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Period from

mmm.year mmm — period

Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year


351



Selection Field

Value

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

2. Analyze the result of the customer

T-BP## and the product

T-F1## .

3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents.

352




Unit 8 Solution 54 Evaluate CO-PA

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Costing-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment – → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .


1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1xx in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → —> Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) Execute the report

S4F20LI and enter the data provided in the table.

c) Execute the Line Item Based Report. d) In the Navigation Panel , double-click Sales Order . e) Position your cursor on the Gross Revenue key figure displayed for your sales order and select Go to — Line Items.


353



f) You can navigate from the CO-PA line item to the FI/CO documents FI/CO documents to the billing document and your sales order.

and from the

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following data: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and, choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial c) Execute the report

screen, select

S4F20CM from the list of reports.

S4F20CM and enter the data provided in the table.

d) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year. b) Double-click customer T-BP## to fix this value. In the contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year.

Form area, you can now see a

Product to list all the products we sold to customer

d) Double-click the product T-F1## to fix this value. In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer T-BP## to release this value. In the area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product T-F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .

Form

Customer to list all the customers who received the

g) In the Navigation area, double-click the product number

T-F1## to release this value.

3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year.

354

Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Performing Period End Closing Activities

b) Double-click customer

T-BP## to fix this value.

c) In the List area, position your cursor on the actual figure in the first row. d) Choose Goto → Line items . e) Double-click the line item of the actual period to obtain a detail view. f) On the Display Line Items screen, select the the characteristics and the value fields.

Value fields tab page. Analyze the values of

g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration .


355




356





UNIT 9

Warehouse Management Stock Transfer

Lesson 1 Explaining WM Structures and Usage

358

Lesson 2 Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)

359

Lesson 3 Processing a Stock Transfer Order

360

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Explain WM structures and usage

●

Explain the difference between EWM and IM

●

Process a stock transfer order


357



Unit 9 Lesson 1 Explaining WM Structures and Usage



WM Structures and Usage LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

358





Unit 9 Lesson 2 Outlining the Difference between EWM, WM, and Inventory Management (IM)



Differences between WM and IM LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



359



Unit 9 Lesson 3 Processing a Stock Transfer Order



Processing a Stock Transfer Order LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

360





UNIT 10

Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

Lesson 1 Describing the Order to Cash Business Process

363

Lesson 2 Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution

364

Exercise 55: Check Material Master Record for Sales

365

Lesson 3 Creating a Customer Master Record

368

Exercise 56: Create a Customer Master Data Record

369

Lesson 4 Creating a Condition Record

375

Exercise 57: Create a Condition Record

377

Lesson 5 Processing a Sales Order

380

Exercise 58: Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

381

Exercise 59: Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

385

Exercise 60: Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

389

Exercise 61: Review the Sales Order

393

Lesson 6 Processing a Delivery Document

397

Exercise 62: Create a Delivery Document

399

Lesson 7 Processing a Customer Invoice

403

Exercise 63: Create a Customer Invoice

405

Exercise 64: Run a CO-PA Report

409

Lesson 8 Explaining Integration to SAP Hybris


416

361


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 10: Order to Cash Processing in SAP S/4HANA

UNIT OBJECTIVES

362

●

Describe the order to cash business process

●

Describe the master data used in sales and distribution

●

Create a customer master record

●

Create a condition record

●

Process a sales order

●

Process a delivery document

●

Process a customer invoice

●

Evaluate CO-PA

●

Explain the integration to SAP Hybris




Unit 10 Lesson 1 Describing the Order to Cash Business Process



The Order to Cash Business Process LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



363



Unit 10 Lesson 2 Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution



Master Data for Sales and Distribution Material Master Data Record

364




Unit 10 Exercise 55 Check Material Master Record for Sales

Business Example You want to sell some bikes to your customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have have to check if the relevant sales views and data for the material T-F1## is maintained. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Display Material app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad 2. Check the Material Master Record for the material T-F1##. Check whether the Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 and Sales: General/Plant Data views are maintained in the relevant organizational units. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

Which Delivering Plant , Item Category group, and Loading group are defined?


365



Unit 10 Solution 55 Check Material Master Record for Sales

Business Example You want to sell some bikes to your customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have have to check if the relevant sales views and data for the material T-F1## is maintained. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start the Display Material app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad a) Choose the Display Material tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad to start the app. 2. Check the Material Master Record for the material T-F1##. Check whether the Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 and Sales: General/Plant Data views are maintained in the relevant organizational units. Use the following information: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Sales Organization

1010


10

Which Delivering Plant , Item Category group, and Loading group are defined?

a) Enter the Material , T-F1##. b) Select the Basic Data 1 , Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2 views. c) Enter the values provided in the table for Channel .

and Sales: General/Plant Data

Plant , Sales Organization , and Distribution

d) To see which Delivering Plant is defined, choose the

Sales: Sales org. 21

e) To see which Item Category group is defined, choose the f) To see which Loading group is defined, choose the

button.

Sales: Sales org. 2

Sales: General/Plant Data

button. button.

g) Leave the screen.

366



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing the Master Data Used in Sales and Distribution




367



Unit 10 Lesson 3 Creating a Customer Master Record



Customer Master Data

368




Unit 10 Exercise 56 Create a Customer Master Data Record

Business Example As new customers are identified, the new customer information must be entered into the system. The Business Partner record stores all customer information necessary to fulfill the order cycle. You want to sell some bikes (material T-F1##) to your new customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have to maintain company code data and sales area data in the relevant organizational areas for this customer in the system. Because the Business Partner exists in general, you only had to add the missing roles. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor T-BP## that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. 1. Maintain the Company Code Data for business partner information:

T-BP## using the following

Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

BP Role

FI Customer

Company Code

1010


12100000

2. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##, using the following information: Field

Value

BP Role

Customer

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sales District

DE0002 (Southern Germany)

Currency

EUR

Price Group

C1 (Regular Buyer)


369



Field

Value

Customer Pricing Procedure

01 (Procedure 01)

Delivering Plant

1010

Shipping Conditions

01 (Standard)

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location1

Plant 1

Terms of Payment

0001 (Pay immediately w/o deduction))

Account Assignment Group

01 (Domestic Revenues)

Tax Classification

1 (Liable for Taxes)

3. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##. Check that the mandatory partner functions have been filled automatically. Write the values in the following table: Partner Function

Number

Sold-To Party Bill-To Party Payer Ship-to Party

370




Unit 10 Solution 56 Create a Customer Master Data Record

Business Example As new customers are identified, the new customer information must be entered into the system. The Business Partner record stores all customer information necessary to fulfill the order cycle. You want to sell some bikes (material T-F1##) to your new customer Bikes & More in Stuttgart. Therefore, you have to maintain company code data and sales area data in the relevant organizational areas for this customer in the system. Because the Business Partner exists in general, you only had to add the missing roles. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Vendor T-BP## that you created the exercise, Create a Vendor Master Record. 1. Maintain the Company Code Data for business partner information:

T-BP## using the following

Field

Value

Business Partner

T-BP##

BP Role

FI Customer

Company Code

1010


12100000

a) Start the Maintain Business Partner Launchpad b) Enter the Business Partner

app from your

TS410 group in the SAP Fiori

T-BP##.

c) Switch to Change mode by using the respective button. d) In the Change in BP Role field, choose the

FI Customer value.

e) Choose Company Code at the top of the screen. f) Enter the Company Code 1010. g) On the Customer: Account Management 12100000.

tab, enter the


h) Save your entries, but don’t leave the screen. 2. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##, using the following information:


371



Field

Value

BP Role

Customer

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sales District

DE0002 (Southern Germany)

Currency

EUR

Price Group

C1 (Regular Buyer)

Customer Pricing Procedure

01 (Procedure 01)

Delivering Plant

1010

Shipping Conditions

01 (Standard)

Incoterms

EXW

Inco. Location1

Plant 1

Terms of Payment

0001 (Pay immediately w/o deduction))

Account Assignment Group

01 (Domestic Revenues)

Tax Classification

1 (Liable for Taxes)

a) In the Change in BP role field, choose the value b) Choose Sales and Distribution

Customer .

at the top of the screen.

c) Enter the values provided in the table for Division .

Sales Organization , Distribution Channel , and

d) Confirm your entries by pressing Enter. e) On the Orders tab, enter the values provided in the table for the Sales District , Currency , Price Group , and Customer Pricing Procedure fields. f) On the Shipping tab, enter the values provided in the table for the the Shipping Conditions .

Delivering Plant add

g) On the Billing tab, enter the values provided in the table for Incoterms , Inco. Location1 , Terms of Payment, Account Assignment Group , and Tax Classification . Note that you might have to scroll to access the entries. h) Save your entries. 3. Maintain Sales Area Data for Business partner T-BP##. Check that the mandatory partner functions have been filled automatically. Write the values in the following table:

372



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Customer Master Record

Partner Function

Number

Sold-To Party Bill-To Party Payer Ship-to Party a) On the Partner Functions tab page, in the Customer Data of your new business partner (T-CUS## ), check the values for the partner functions and write them in the table.


373




374





Unit 10 Lesson 4 Creating a Condition Record



Condition Records


375



376




Unit 10 Exercise 57 Create a Condition Record

Business Example Your customer may negotiate special pricing or discounts with you. These special deals are maintained in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management System as “conditions”. You want to create a customer material specific price for your new customer T-BP## and the Bike TF11##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Using the Set Material Prices the following information:

app, maintain the Price Data for the customer T-BP## using

Field

Value

Condition Type

PPR0

Sales Organization

1010


10

Customer

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Valid On

Today

Amount

444 Euro


377



Unit 10 Solution 57 Create a Condition Record

Business Example Your customer may negotiate special pricing or discounts with you. These special deals are maintained in the SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management System as “conditions”. You want to create a customer material specific price for your new customer T-BP## and the Bike TF11##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Using the Set Material Prices the following information:

app, maintain the Price Data for the customer T-BP## using

Field

Value

Condition Type

PPR0

Sales Organization

1010


10

Customer

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Valid On

Today

Amount

444 Euro

a) Choose the Set Material Prices

from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

b) Enter Condition Type PPR0 and press Enter. c) In the dialog box, select

Customer and Material with Release status.

d) On the Screen Change Price (PPR0): Selection screen enter the values provided in the table for the Sales Organization , Distribution Channel , Customer , Material , and Valid On fields. e) Click the Execute button on the top of the screen. f) On the Change Price Condition (PPR0): Overview press Enter. g) Maintain the price by entering

screen, enter

Material T-F1## and

444 in the Amount field.

h) Save your entries.

378



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Condition Record




379



Unit 10 Lesson 5 Processing a Sales Order



Sales Order Process Sales Order Types Sales Order Structure

380




Unit 10 Exercise 58 Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

Business Example Your customer T-BP## Bike & More request 10 bikes T-F1##. You want to make him a quotation with special conditions. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a quotation using the Create Quotation using the following information:

app from your group

Field

Value

Quotation Type

QT

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Valid To

End of next month

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Price (PPR0)

399 Euro

TS410 group and

Write down the quotation number. Quotation number:_______________________________________________________


381



Unit 10 Solution 58 Create a Quotation and a Sales Order

Business Example Your customer T-BP## Bike & More request 10 bikes T-F1##. You want to make him a quotation with special conditions. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a quotation using the Create Quotation using the following information:

app from your group

Field

Value

Quotation Type

QT

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Valid To

End of next month

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Price (PPR0)

399 Euro

TS410 group and

Write down the quotation number. Quotation number:_______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Create Quotation

app from your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

b) On the Create Quotation: Initial Screen , enter the Quotation Type and the relevant organizational data as provided in the table. c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Quotation: Overview screen, enter the values provided in the table for the Sold-To Party , Valid To date, Material , and Ordered Quantity . e) Press Enter.

382



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Sales Order

f) Click the Sales button and change the Payment Terms to 0003 within 14 days 3& cash discount, within 20 days 2& cash discount and within 30 days Due net. g) Select the item 10 and click the

Display Item Details icon.

h) Click the Conditions button and change the

Price (PPR0) to 399 Euro.

i) Save the Quotation. The Quotation number is displayed on the bottom of the screen. j) Write down the Quotation number in the space provided.


383



384




Unit 10 Exercise 59 Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

Business Example The Quotation you created in exercise before convinced your customer. He orders the bikes. Therefore,you have to create a sales order with reference to the quotation. You don’t enter a PO Number, so the Sales Order will be saved incomplete. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the quotation number from the exercise, Create a Quotation. 1. Create a Sales Order with reference to a quotation using the the following information: Field

Value

Order Type

OR

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Create Sales Order

app and

Write down the Sales Order Number. Sales Order Number:_________________________________________________________


385



Unit 10 Solution 59 Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation

Business Example The Quotation you created in exercise before convinced your customer. He orders the bikes. Therefore,you have to create a sales order with reference to the quotation. You don’t enter a PO Number, so the Sales Order will be saved incomplete. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the quotation number from the exercise, Create a Quotation. 1. Create a Sales Order with reference to a quotation using the the following information: Field

Value

Order Type

OR

Sales Organization

1010


10

Division

00

Sold-To party

T-BP##

Material

T-F1##

Order Quantity

10

Payment Terms

0003

Create Sales Order

app and

Write down the Sales Order Number. Sales Order Number:_________________________________________________________ a) Choose the Create Sales Order Launchpad.


b) On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter the Order Type and the relevant organizational data as provided in the table. c) To reference to the Quotation, choose the

Create with Reference

button.

d) In the Create with Reference dialog box, enter the Quotation Number exercise, Create a Quotation, and choose the Copy .

386

from the previous




e) Press Enter. f) Confirm the message:

Enter Customer Reference by pressing Enter.

g) Save the Sales Order . In the Save Incomplete Document write down the order number.

dialog box, choose

Save . and

The Sales Order number is displayed on the bottom of the screen h) Write down the Sales Order Number in the space provided above.


387



388




Unit 10 Exercise 60 Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

Business Example You want to check issues in the Sales Order Fulfillment process with the Sales Order Fulfillment Cockpit. You will find the Sales Order that you created in the exercise before and saved without a PO number. You complete your Sales Order to enable the further distribution process. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation. 1. Start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues Launchpad.


2. How many issues exist in total in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE? Total number of issues in sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE: __________________________________________________________________ 3. How many issues exist in total for your Customer

T-BP## ?

Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________ 4. Check the issues for your Customer and resolve any issues.


389



Unit 10 Solution 60 Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues

Business Example You want to check issues in the Sales Order Fulfillment process with the Sales Order Fulfillment Cockpit. You will find the Sales Order that you created in the exercise before and saved without a PO number. You complete your Sales Order to enable the further distribution process. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation. 1. Start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues Launchpad.


a) To start the Sales Order Fulfillment Issues TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

app, choose the corresponding tile in your

2. How many issues exist in total in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE? a) On the Sales Order Fulfillment Issue Screen Sales Organizations.

, you see the number of issues in the Top 10

b) Note the number of issues in Sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org. Total number of issues in sales Organization 1010 Dom. Sales Org DE: __________________________________________________________________ 3. How many issues exist in total for your Customer a) On the Sales Order Fulfillment Issue Screen left. For a clear view chose

T-BP## ? , select Customer in the select list on the

Tabular view (small icon on the right top of the screen).

b) Note the number of issues for Customer T-BP##. Total number of issues for Customer T-BP##: __________________________________________________________________ 4. Check the issues for your Customer and resolve any issues. a) Select your Customer

T-BP## and choose

b) Choose Resolve Sales Order Issues

Open .

.

Your Sales Order from the previous exercise, Create a Sales Order with Reference to a Quotation, will be listed. c) Click the arrow on the right to open the screen issues details.

390




d) Choose Open and select Sales Order . e) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Order → Edit .

screen, from the Menu, choose

f) On the Change Standard Order * Overview Edit → Incompletion Log .

screen, from the Menu, choose

Sales

g) Choose the Complete Data button on the top. h) Fill in the PO number ##-Sales Order in the screen.

Display Standard Order * Header Data

i) Choose Back . j) Save the Order Change.


391



392




Unit 10 Exercise 61 Review the Sales Order

Business Example You want to check the Sales Order that you created in the previous exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. 1. Start the Display Sales Order

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

2. What is the Shipping Condition of the Sales Order? You find the Shipping Condition in the Header Data of the

Shipping tab.

Shipping Condition: __________________________________________________________________ 3. From which Plant will the Bikes be delivered, and what is the You find the (Delivery)

Shipping Point ?

Plant and the Shipping Point on the Shipping of Item Data

tab.

(Delivery) Plant:_________________________________________________________ Shipping Point:__________________________________________________________ 4. What is the delivery date and what quantity is confirmed? You find the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity Item.

in the Schedule Line(s)

of the order

Delivery Date:_________________________________________________________ Confirmed Quantity:__________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Total Processing status and the Delivery status of the order? Total Processing Status:_________________________________________________________ Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ 6. View the Document flow of the order.


393



Unit 10 Solution 61 Review the Sales Order

Business Example You want to check the Sales Order that you created in the previous exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Sales Order created in the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues. 1. Start the Display Sales Order

app from your TS410 group in the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

a) To start the Display Sales Order app, choose the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. 2. What is the Shipping Condition of the Sales Order? You find the Shipping Condition in the Header Data of the

Shipping tab.

a) On the Display Standard Order: Initial Screen , enter the Order number from the exercise, Check and Solve Sales Order Fulfillment Issues, and press Enter. b) On the Display Standard Order * Overview icon. c) On the Display Standard Order * Header

screen, choose the screen, choose the

Display Header Data Shipping button.

d) Note the Shipping Condition . e) Choose Back to return to the

Display Standard Order * Overview

screen

Shipping Condition: __________________________________________________________________ 3. From which Plant will the Bikes be delivered, and what is the You find the (Delivery)

Shipping Point ?

Plant and the Shipping Point on the Shipping of Item Data

a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Display Item Details icon.

screen, select

b) On the Display Standard Order * Item Data

screen, choose the

c) Note the (Delivery)

tab.

Item 10 and choose the Shipping button.

Plant and the Shipping Point .

d) Choose Back to return to the


screen

(Delivery) Plant:_________________________________________________________ Shipping Point:__________________________________________________________ 4. What is the delivery date and what quantity is confirmed?

394




You find the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity Item. a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview Schedule Lines for Item icon. You are now on the Schedule Line(s)

in the Schedule Line(s)

screen, select

Display Standard Order * Item Data

of the order

Item 10 and choose the screen, and can see the

b) Note the Delivery Date and the Confirmed Quantity . c) Choose Back to return to the


screen

Delivery Date:_________________________________________________________ Confirmed Quantity:__________________________________________________________ 5. What is the Total Processing status and the Delivery status of the order? a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview b) On the Sales order: Status Overview the relevant status. c) Note the Total Processing

Status Overview button.

screen, expand the current header status and note

and the Delivery status.

The Total Processing status is The Delivery status is

screen, choose the

Open .

Not delivered .

Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ d) Choose Back to return to the


screen

Total Processing Status:_________________________________________________________ Delivery Status:__________________________________________________________ 6. View the Document flow of the order. a) On the Display Standard Order * Overview screen place the cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display document flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. You see that your order is based on your quotation.


395




396





Unit 10 Lesson 6 Processing a Delivery Document



Processing a Delivery Document Delivery Types Delivery Document Structure Picking Process Goods Issue Processing


397



398




Unit 10 Exercise 62 Create a Delivery Document

Business Example To trigger and proceed shipping process, you have to create a Delivery for your Sales Order. After you created the delivery document, you pick the item and post the goods issue. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order for shipping point your Ship-To Party T-BP## .

1010 and

Write down the document number of the delivery: Document Number:______________________________________ 2. Check the status of the order again. What is the Total processing order?

status, the

Delivery status and the

Billing status of the Sales

Total processing status: ____________________________________________ Billing status: ______________________________________________________ Delivery status:____________________________________________________ 3. View the Document flow of the order and check the (overall) status of your delivery. What is the status of your delivery?_________________________________________ 4. Pick 10 PC of the material for the outbound delivery and post the goods issue. 5. Post the goods issue. 6. Check the status of your delivery using the information.

Outbound Delivery app and the following

Field

Value

Shipping Point

1010

Picking Date

All

Planned GI Date

All

Overall Status

GI Posted

Ship-To Party

T-BP##

What is the Picking status of your delivery?_________________________________________ What is the GI status of your delivery?_________________________________________


399



Unit 10 Solution 62 Create a Delivery Document

Business Example To trigger and proceed shipping process, you have to create a Delivery for your Sales Order. After you created the delivery document, you pick the item and post the goods issue. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order for shipping point your Ship-To Party T-BP## .

1010 and

a) Start the Create Outbound Deliveries app, by choosing the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) In the Shipping Point field, enter 1010 and, in the Ship-To Party field, enter T-BP##. c) To see a list of sales documents corresponding to your selection, choose d) Select your sales order and choose e) To navigate the log, choose

Go.

Create Deliveries at the bottom of the screen.

Display Log .

f) Choose the Deliveries category. You find the document number of the created outbound delivery in the log. Write down the document number of the delivery: Document Number:______________________________________ 2. Check the status of the order again. What is the Total processing order?

status, the

Delivery status and the

Billing status of the Sales

a) Start the Display Sales Order app, by choosing the corresponding tile in your TS410 group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) On the On the Display Sales Order: Initial Screen previous exercise and press Enter.

, enter the Order (number) from the

c) On the On the Display Sales Order: Overview Screen, button. d) On the Sales Order: Status Overview Screen note the relevant status. e) Choose the Back button to return to the

, choose the

Status Overview

, expand the current header status and Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen

.

Total processing status: ____________________________________________ Billing status: ______________________________________________________

400



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Delivery Document

Delivery status:____________________________________________________ 3. View the Document flow of the order and check the (overall) status of your delivery. What is the status of your delivery?_________________________________________ a) On the Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen , place your cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display Document Flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. Your order is based on your quotation and you see the delivery based on your sales order. The status of the delivery is

Open .

4. Pick 10 PC of the material for the outbound delivery and post the goods issue. a) Start the Pick Outbound Delivery Launchpad.

app in your Order Fulfillment group on the SAP Fiori

b) Enter the number of your outbound delivery in the corresponding field and press Enter. c) On the Pick Outbound Delivery screen, ensure that you are in the and enter 10 PC as Picking Quantity .

Picking process step

d) Choose Save . e) Stay in the app. 5. Post the goods issue. a) In the Pick Outbound Delivery

app, choose the

GI Ready view.

b) Choose Post GI . 6. Check the status of your delivery using the information.

Outbound Delivery app and the following

Field

Value

Shipping Point

1010

Picking Date

All

Planned GI Date

All

Overall Status

GI Posted

Ship-To Party

T-BP##

a) Choose the Outbound Delivery app in your Order Fulfillment group on the SAP Fiori Launchpad. b) On the Outbound Delivery Screen choose Go. On the Outbound Delivery Screen status information.

, enter the relevant data as provided in the table and , your delivery is listed and you find the relevant

What is the Picking status of your delivery?_________________________________________ What is the GI status of your delivery?_________________________________________


401




402





Unit 10 Lesson 7 Processing a Customer Invoice



●

Evaluate CO-PA

Processing a Customer Invoice


403



404




Unit 10 Exercise 63 Create a Customer Invoice

Business Example After you delivered the bikes, you want to invoice them. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the outbound delivery from the previous exercise, Create a Delivery Document. 1. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise, Create a Delivery Document, using the Create Billing Document app. Write down the document number of the billing document. Billing document number:________________________________ 2. View the document flow for your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document, using the Display Sales Order app. 3. Check the billing status of the sales Order.


405



Unit 10 Solution 63 Create a Customer Invoice

Business Example After you delivered the bikes, you want to invoice them. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the outbound delivery from the previous exercise, Create a Delivery Document. 1. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery you created in the exercise, Create a Delivery Document, using the Create Billing Document app. a) Start the Create Billing Document Launchpad.


b) In the Document field, enter the document number of your delivery from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document and press Enter. c) On the Invoice (F2) Create: Overview of Billing Items billing document.

screen, choose

Save to create the

The number of the created document is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Write down the document number of the billing document. Billing document number:________________________________ 2. View the document flow for your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document, using the Display Sales Order app. a) Start the Display Sales Order Launchpad.


b) On the Display sales Order: Initial Screen , in the Order field, enter the document number of your Sales order from the exercise, Create a Delivery Document. c) Press Enter. d) On the Display Standard Order *: Overview Screen , place your cursor in a header field (for example, Sold-To party ) and choose the Display Document Flow button. You see the document flow on header level for your order. You see your order is based on your quotation. Based on the Sales order, you find the delivery and based of the delivery you see the Picking request, the post issue document, and the invoice. Based on the invoice, you find the Accounting document. All (overall) Status are completed besides of the Accounting document. The status not cleared means there is no payment posted in accounting. 3. Check the billing status of the sales Order.

406



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing a Customer Invoice

a) In the document flow, select

Standard Order

and choose the

Status overview

button.

b) Expand the Status header. The Billing status is


Fully invoiced .

407



Evaluating CO-PA

408




Unit 10 Exercise 64 Run a CO-PA Report

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Posting-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA using the menu path Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern Choose operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

.

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1## in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA, for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1


409



Selection Field

Value

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)



T-F1## .

3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Account-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in costing-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Note: Make sure that you switch to the account-based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Account-based CO-PA .


1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)



T-F1## .


410




Unit 10 Solution 64 Run a CO-PA Report

Business Example You have entered the business transactions in the “Production Process” and in “sales and distribution”. You now want to examine the results from various market segments. You want to know where your profits rose and where they fell, and analyze the causes of these changes. This information is required not only at the end of the period, but also after each sales transaction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Display Line Items in Posting-Based CO-PA Generated by the System In this task, you display the line items generated by the system, which are a result of billing and settling the produced finished goods. Note: Make sure that you switch to the costing based CO-PA using the menu path Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern Choose operating concern A000 and select Costing-based CO-PA .

.

1. As a result of billing now and settling the production order for T-F1## in the production process earlier, postings were made to CO-PA, for which the system generated line items. Display the line items by choosing Actual Postings from the menu. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Period from


Period to

mmm.year

Plan/Act. Indicator

0 (Actual)

Record Type

F

a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu , go to Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) Execute the report

S4F20LI and enter the data provided in the table.

c) Execute the Line Item Based Report

.

d) In the Navigation Panel , double-click Sales Order . e) Position your cursor on the Gross Revenue key figure displayed for your sales order and select Go to — Line Items.


411



f) You can navigate from the CO-PA line item to the FI/CO documents FI/CO documents to the billing document and your sales order.

and from the

Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Costing-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in account-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. 1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . b) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial c) Execute the report

screen, select



d) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year. b) Double-click customer


In the Form area, you can now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year. d) Double-click the product


T-F1## to fix this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer

T-BP## to release this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .

T-





412




a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year. b) Double-click customer





g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration . Perform Profit Analysis for Contribution Margin Report in Account-Based CO-PA In this task, you examine the results for your company. Run in costing-based CO-PA the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Note: Make sure that you switch to the account-based CO-PA via menu path → Profitability Analysis → Environment → Set operating concern operating concern A000 and select Account-based CO-PA .


1. Run the contribution margin report S4F20CM (graphical report output) for the current fiscal year. Use the following information: Selection Field

Value

Fiscal Year

current year

Period from

1

Period to

12

Version

0 (Actual)

a) Switch to costing-based CO-PA. b) On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, select the Market Segments Plan/Actuals app and choose Accounting → Controlling → Profitability Analysis → Information System → Execute Report . c) On the Run Profitability Report: Initial d) Execute the report

screen, select



e) Choose Execute . 2. Analyze the result of the customer


T-F1## .

a) On the Execute Profitability Report screen, in the Navigation area, double-click Customer to list all the customers to whom we sold products in the current year. b) Double-click customer



413



In the Form area, you can now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer. c) In the Navigation area, double-click T-BP## in the current year. d) Double-click the product


T-F1## to fix this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report for this specific customer with this specific product. e) In the Navigation area, double-click customer

T-BP## to release this value.

In the Form area, you now see a contribution margin report specifically for product F1## , independent of the receiving customers. f) In the Navigation area, double-click product T-F1## .

T-




3. Drill down to the actual line items for customer T-BP## to view the postings you made to CO-PA and analyze the corresponding accounting documents. a) In the Navigation area, double-click products in the current year. b) Double-click customer





g) To display the accounting documents created together with the CO-PA line item, choose Environment → Integration .

414






●

Evaluate CO-PA


415



Unit 10 Lesson 8 Explaining Integration to SAP Hybris



SAP Hybris Integration LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●

416





UNIT 11

Project System

Lesson 1 Describing the Process Steps in Project System

419

Lesson 2 Creating a Project Structure

420

Exercise 65: Create a Project Structure

421

Lesson 3 Planning a Project

425

Exercise 66: Plan Resources in a Project

427

Exercise 67: Plan Dates in a Project

433

Exercise 68: Plan Costs in a Project

437

Lesson 4 Budgeting in a Project

443

Exercise 69: Create the Budget for a Project

445

Exercise 70: Release a Project

449

Exercise 71: Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

455

Exercise 72: Post Time Confirmation with CATS

459

Lesson 5 Executing a Project

463

Lesson 6 Evaluating Projects

464

Lesson 7 Processing Period-End Closing Activities

465

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Describe the process steps in project system


417


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 11: Project System

418

●

Create a project structure

●

Plan Resources in a project

●

Plan dates in a project

●

Plan costs in a project

●

Create the budget for a project

●

Execute a project

●

Record labor for a project

●

Post materials for project

●

Evaluate project structures

●

Evaluate project costs

●

Process period-end closing activities




Unit 11 Lesson 1 Describing the Process Steps in Project System



Process Steps in a Project System LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



419



Unit 11 Lesson 2 Creating a Project Structure



Project Structure

420




Unit 11 Exercise 65 Create a Project Structure

Business Example You want to redesign your bicycle and develop a new product line. To plan all the activities and track the costs and the dates, you will use a project for development. Because there are no SAP Fiori apps available yet, we will use the back-end system direct. To create your project you will copy a standard project T/0001 including the assigned standard network. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the project you using the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description

Development bicycle TS410-##

Start

Today

Finish

Today + 12 Month

Project Profile

TS410

Std. Project Definition

T/0001

Responsible Person

100000##

Planning element

Set all Elements to Planning elements


421



Unit 11 Solution 65 Create a Project Structure

Business Example You want to redesign your bicycle and develop a new product line. To plan all the activities and track the costs and the dates, you will use a project for development. Because there are no SAP Fiori apps available yet, we will use the back-end system direct. To create your project you will copy a standard project T/0001 including the assigned standard network. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create the project you using the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description


Start

Today

Finish

Today + 12 Month

Project Profile

TS410


T/0001

Responsible Person

100000##

Planning element

Set all Elements to Planning elements

a) In the Sap Easy Access Menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ20N. b) On the initial screen of

Project Builder , choose Create → Copy Project and press Enter.

c) On the Create Project, enter the following data:

422

Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

Description


Start

Today

Finish

Today + 12 Month



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating a Project Structure

Field

Value

Project Profile

TS410


T/0001

d) Press Enter. e) Choose the Overview WBS Elements icon. f) Choose the Basic Data tab and select all the elements as

PE – Planning element

.

g) Go to the Responsibilities in the WBS element Overview and enter Responsible Person 100000## as the Responsible Person for all WBS elements. h) Go to the Detail of the Project Definition and enter the 100000## for the Project Definition .

Responsible Person

i) Save your project.


423




424





Unit 11 Lesson 3 Planning a Project



●


●


Resource Planning in a Project


425



426




Unit 11 Exercise 66 Plan Resources in a Project

Business Example You want to assign your newly hired project engineer to your project. Therefore, you first need to create a new work center that can be used in the network operations. During the creation, you will assign the organizational structure from HCM to the work center. The employee included in the structure can then be used for the assignment in the project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Create a Work Center for the Project System 1. Create a new work center for the usage of project system, T-ENG## by copying an existing work center T-ENG00 . Copy all relevant data views. Use the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-ENG##

Work Center Category

0006

Copy from Plant

1010

Ref. work Center

T-ENG00

2. Assign the work center to the organizational unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Allocate the Work Center and the Employee to the Network Now that you have created the new work center, you change your project and allocate the work center in your operations. 1. Assign the work center

T-ENG## to the internal processed operations.

2. For the operations 10 to 40 you assign your personnel number. In operation 50 assign a production work center T-A##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 10-40)

T-ENG##


427



428

Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 50)

T-A##

Activity Type (Op. 50)

11




Unit 11 Solution 66 Plan Resources in a Project

Business Example You want to assign your newly hired project engineer to your project. Therefore, you first need to create a new work center that can be used in the network operations. During the creation, you will assign the organizational structure from HCM to the work center. The employee included in the structure can then be used for the assignment in the project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Organizational Unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. Create a Work Center for the Project System 1. Create a new work center for the usage of project system, T-ENG## by copying an existing work center T-ENG00 . Copy all relevant data views. Use the following data: Field

Value

Plant

1010

Work Center

T-ENG##

Work Center Category

0006

Copy from Plant

1010

Ref. work Center

T-ENG00

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Basic Data → Master Data → Work Center → Master Record . Alternatively, use transaction code CNR1. b) On the initial Actual settlement: Order

screen, enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter. d) In the Copy from dialog box, select Window mark all the views in the data selection area and press Enter. 2. Assign the work center to the organizational unit, PRD-##, that you created in the exercise, Create an Organizational Unit and a Position in Organizational Management. a) On the Create Work Center: Assignment to HR Organizational Entity screen, select Organizational Unit , enter PRD* in the Search Term field and press Enter.


429



b) From the result list, choose your entry c) Return to the

PRD-## . Engineering ##.

Basic Data and change the description to

d) Save the work center. Allocate the Work Center and the Employee to the Network Now that you have created the new work center, you change your project and allocate the work center in your operations. 1. Assign the work center

T-ENG## to the internal processed operations.

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Builder . Alternatively, use transaction code b) On the initial Project Builder screen, select your project

T/00##

CJ20N.

and open it.

c) Expand the entire structure and select the network header. 2. For the operations 10 to 40 you assign your personnel number. In operation 50 assign a production work center T-A##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Work Center (Op. 10-40)

T-ENG##

Work Center (Op. 50)

T-A##

Activity Type (Op. 50)

11

a) Choose the Operations Overview

icon in the Identification and View

b) In the Operations 10 to 40, enter your newly created work center. T-A## and choose

c) In Operation 50, enter the work center

d) On the left side of the project builder, double-check e) To add the Person allocated to the work centre, In the choose the Person assignment tab f) Select the person by searching in the

selection. T-ENG##.

Activity type 11.

Operation 10 to select it. Detail section of Operation 10,

Person field.

There should be only one person available. g) Repeat steps d) to f) for Operations 20 to 40. h) Save your project.

430



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Planning a Project

Dates Planning in a Project


431



432




Unit 11 Exercise 67 Plan Dates in a Project

Business Example After you created your project, you want to plan dates on the WBS elements. Due to the assigned network, scheduling is performed automatically by the operations. You want to plan basic dates on the level 2 elements to give a timeframe for the scheduling. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Basic Dates in the Project You want to plan the basic dates in more detail in the project. Therefore you will enter start and end dates for the level 2 WBS elements. Due to the fact that there is no list functionality available in the project builder, you use the planning board for this. 1. Plan the following basic dates for your project, T/00##: WBS element

Start Date

Finish Date

T/00##-1

Today

Today + 2 M

T/00##-2

Today + 2 M

Today + 4 M

T/00##-3

Today + 3 M

Today + 6 M

T/00##-4

Today + 6 M

Today + 9 M

2. Extrapolate the dates to the higher level WBS and the project definition. Evaluate the Project from a Technical Perspective 1. Evaluate your project T/00## from a technical perspective using the and the following data: Field

Value

PS Info Profile

000000000002

Project

T/00##


Structure Overview

433



Unit 11 Solution 67 Plan Dates in a Project

Business Example After you created your project, you want to plan dates on the WBS elements. Due to the assigned network, scheduling is performed automatically by the operations. You want to plan basic dates on the level 2 elements to give a timeframe for the scheduling. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Basic Dates in the Project You want to plan the basic dates in more detail in the project. Therefore you will enter start and end dates for the level 2 WBS elements. Due to the fact that there is no list functionality available in the project builder, you use the planning board for this. 1. Plan the following basic dates for your project, T/00##: WBS element

Start Date

Finish Date

T/00##-1

Today

Today + 2 M

T/00##-2

Today + 2 M

Today + 4 M

T/00##-3

Today + 3 M

Today + 6 M

T/00##-4

Today + 6 M

Today + 9 M

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Planning Board → Change Project . . b) On the Initial screen of 00##.

, in the Project field, enter T/

Change Project Planning Board

c) Choose the Open Project icon. d) In the planning board, plan the dates as outline in the table. You can plan the dates by using drag and drop, or double-checking the corresponding WBS element, choosing the Dates tab, and entering Basic Start Date and Basic Fin. Date . e) Stay in the planning board. 2. Extrapolate the dates to the higher level WBS and the project definition. a) Choose the Select All icon to select the WBS elements. b) Choose Edit → Reconcile Dates

→ Extrapolate dates

.

c) Save the project. Evaluate the Project from a Technical Perspective

434




1. Evaluate your project T/00## from a technical perspective using the and the following data: Field

Value

PS Info Profile

000000000002

Project

T/00##

a) In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Project System System → Structures → Structure Overview . When using the structure overview the first time, the system asks for a

Structure Overview

→ Information PS Info Profile .

b) In the PS Info Profile field, enter 000000000002. c) Press Enter. d) On the initial screen of 00##.

Project Info System: Structure

, in the Project field, enter T/

e) Execute the report (F8). You a see the project in a structural overview. f) Exit the report without saving.


435



Cost Planning in a Project

436




Unit 11 Exercise 68 Plan Costs in a Project

Business Example You have not done the detailed planning of the network, but you want to have cost planning done on a higher level and, in a particular version, to compare the costs later. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Cost Elements in the Project For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison you decide to plan cost for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. You want to compare to the costs in the network. This planning is a manual planning on WBS elements. Because you want to compare to the costs later from network you will perform that costing in a different cost planning version. You will use version 1 for the manual planning. 1. For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison, plan costs for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. Use the following data for the planning: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Version

1

In the Activity Input planning use the following data: WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

T/00##-2

T-ENG00

ENG-00

30

T/00##-3

T-ENG00

ENG-00

50

T/00##-4

T-ENG00

ENG-00

60

Evaluate Costs – Cost Comparison Now that you planned your cost manually, you want to compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network. 1. Compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network by running a cost element report. Use the following data:


437



Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Controlling Area

A000

Plan Version A

0

Plan Version B

1

From fiscal year

1900

To Fiscal year

2017

From Period

1

To Period

12

Write down the planned costs for Version 0 and for Version 1 (the figures can vary, so no solution is provided). Planned Costs Version 0: _____________________________________________________ Planned Costs Version 1: _____________________________________________________

438




Unit 11 Solution 68 Plan Costs in a Project

Business Example You have not done the detailed planning of the network, but you want to have cost planning done on a higher level and, in a particular version, to compare the costs later. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Plan Cost Elements in the Project For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison you decide to plan cost for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. You want to compare to the costs in the network. This planning is a manual planning on WBS elements. Because you want to compare to the costs later from network you will perform that costing in a different cost planning version. You will use version 1 for the manual planning. 1. For a preliminary costing and the option of cost comparison, plan costs for the cost center T-ENG00 with activity type ENG-00 on the WBS elements. Use the following data for the planning: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Version

1

In the Activity Input planning use the following data: WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

T/00##-2

T-ENG00

ENG-00

30

T/00##-3

T-ENG00

ENG-00

50

T/00##-4

T-ENG00

ENG-00

60

a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Accounting → Investment Management → Investment Projects → Planning → Total Costs → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ40. b) On the initial screen of

Change Cost Planning

enter the data provided in the table.

c) Press Enter.


439



d) Select the first level 2 WBS element, e) Enter the following data in the

T/00##-1 , and choose the

Activity Input icon.

Change Planning Activity Input: Overview Screen

WBS element

Cost Center

Activity Type

Quantity

T/00##-1

T-ENG00

ENG-00

40

:

f) Go back. g) Confirm the dialog box with

Yes .

h) Repeat steps d) to g) for the following 3 WBS Elements, T/00##-2 to T/00##-4, using the data provided in the table. i) Select the WBS elements for which you planned the figures and select the Element Plan column. j) From the menu, choose

Cost

Edit → Copy View .

k) Confirm the dialog box by pressing Enter. l) Select all WBS Elements and, from the menu, choose

Edit → Total Up .

m) Confirm the dialog box by pressing Enter. n) Save your planning. Evaluate Costs – Cost Comparison Now that you planned your cost manually, you want to compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network. 1. Compare your planning to the automatic cost planning of the network by running a cost element report. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project

T/00##

Controlling Area

A000

Plan Version A

0

Plan Version B

1

From fiscal year

1900

To Fiscal year

2017

From Period

1

To Period

12

a) In the SAP Easy Access Menu, choose Information System → Project System → Financials → Costs → Plan based → By Cost Element → Comparison of 2 Plan Version . Alternatively, use transaction code S_ALR_87013554.

440




b) On the initial screen of table.

Comparison of 2 Plan Version

enter the data provided in the

c) Execute the report. You see a cost element report for your project. Write down the planned costs for Version 0 and for Version 1 (the figures can vary, so no solution is provided). Planned Costs Version 0: _____________________________________________________ Planned Costs Version 1: _____________________________________________________


441




442

●


●


●





Unit 11 Lesson 4 Budgeting in a Project



●

Execute a project

●


Budgeting in a Project


443



444




Unit 11 Exercise 69 Create the Budget for a Project

Business Example After the planning of the project is done you receive a budget allocated. The budgeting takes place based on the cost planning. Be aware that the budget will be allocated for the entire project. For the budgeting you will copy the existing planning from Version 0 into the budget. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. After you planned the costs in the project, your project T/00### receives a budget. Allocate a budget based on the cost planning in the network – Version 0. Assign only an original budget; there is no released budget planned in the budget profile. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

2. Assign 90% of the planned costs as a budget. Note: It is possible that you have planned figures for more than one year. The budgeting then needs to be done for each year.


445



Unit 11 Solution 69 Create the Budget for a Project

Business Example After the planning of the project is done you receive a budget allocated. The budgeting takes place based on the cost planning. Be aware that the budget will be allocated for the entire project. For the budgeting you will copy the existing planning from Version 0 into the budget. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. After you planned the costs in the project, your project T/00### receives a budget. Allocate a budget based on the cost planning in the network – Version 0. Assign only an original budget; there is no released budget planned in the budget profile. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Financials → Budgeting → Original Budget → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code CJ30. b) On the Initial screen of 00## and press Enter.

Change Original Budget , in the Project Definition field, enter T/

c) In the Change Original Budget: WBS Element Overview Elements.

screen, select all WBS

2. Assign 90% of the planned costs as a budget. Note: It is possible that you have planned figures for more than one year. The budgeting then needs to be done for each year. a) Select the Planned Totals , and from the menu, choose b) In the Copy View window, change the percentage to

Edit → Copy View . 90% and press Enter.

c) Change the period to the next year. d) If there are planned costs for the next year as well, proceed as above e) Save the budgeting. f) Ignore the Warning by pressing Enter.

446



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Budgeting in a Project

Releasing a Project Executing a Project


447



448




Unit 11 Exercise 70 Release a Project

Business Example You planned dates and resources in your project. Now you want to assign the materials from the original BOM of the bicycle to your project. Therefore, you create a project BOM and assign it to the project. Once you have planned the materials you will release your project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create the Project BOM You want to create a WBS BOM to be used as a template in your project. 1. Copy the existing BOM for T-F1## from production to a WBS BOM for the WBS T/00##-3 . Use the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

Copy Material BOM

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

Reference Point

ZTS410

Element

Adjust Project – Assign Components to Project 1 1. Assign the components to the project. Use the PS – BOM interface to assign your newly created BOM to your project. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010


449



Field

Value

BOM Usage

3

Release the Project After the planning of your project is finished now you want to see whether the materials have been assigned and you will release your project. 1. Open your Project. 2. Are your materials assigned?

3. Release your project using the

450

Project Definition T/00##.




Unit 11 Solution 70 Release a Project

Business Example You planned dates and resources in your project. Now you want to assign the materials from the original BOM of the bicycle to your project. Therefore, you create a project BOM and assign it to the project. Once you have planned the materials you will release your project. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. Create the Project BOM You want to create a WBS BOM to be used as a template in your project. 1. Copy the existing BOM for T-F1## from production to a WBS BOM for the WBS T/00##-3 . Use the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

Copy Material BOM

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

Reference Point

ZTS410

Element

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bill of Material (BOM) → Bill of Materials → WBS BOM → Single Level → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code CS71. b) On the Initial screen of

Create WBS BOM , enter the following data:

Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010


451



Field

Value

Usage

3

c) Choose the Copy Material BOM icon. d) In the Copy Material BOM window, enter the following data: Field

Value

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

Usage

1

e) Press Enter. f) Select all of the items and choose the

Copy icon.

g) On the screen

Create WBS BOM General Item Overview

h) To choose the

Detail of the first item, double-click the item number.

i) In the Item detail , in the Reference Point

screen, select all of the items.

field, enter ZTS410.

j) Repeat steps h) to i) for all items. k) Save the BOM. Adjust Project – Assign Components to Project 1 1. Assign the components to the project. Use the PS – BOM interface to assign your newly created BOM to your project. Use the following data: Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Material → Planning → Bill of Material Transfer . Alternatively, use transaction code CS71. b) On the Initial screen of

452

Bill of Material Transfer enter the following data:

Field

Value

Project Definition

T/00##




Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Profile

Z410

c) Choose the Selection Parameters

icon (Shift + F5).

d) In the Selection of BOM Item section, enter the following data: Field

Value

WBS Element

T/00##-3

Material

T-F1##

Plant

1010

BOM Usage

3

e) Choose Execute (F8). f) Confirm the warning by pressing Enter. g) On the Result Overview screen, check whether all the components have been selected and assigned to your network – Operation 40 . h) Save the assignment. Release the Project After the planning of your project is finished now you want to see whether the materials have been assigned and you will release your project. 1. Open your Project. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Project → Project Builder . Alternatively, use transaction code b) To open your Project, double-click your project in the

CJ20N.

Worklist section.

c) Expand your project. 2. Are your materials assigned? There should be 4 materials assigned to operation 40. 3. Release your project using the

Project Definition T/00##.

a) Select your Project Definition and choose the menu entry

Edit → Status → Release .

b) Save your project.


453



Project Confirmation Activity Allocation for a Project Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)

454




Unit 11 Exercise 71 Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

Business Example The project engineer has worked some hours for the project. You now need to confirm the time for the first two operations. For the following posting you will use CATS later in the next exercise. You will use a collective confirmation for the first posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the first two operations using the following data: Field

Value

Network

Your network number

Operation

10 and 20

Actual Work activity 10

8

Actual work activity 20

20


455



Unit 11 Solution 71 Post a Confirmation of Time for your Project

Business Example The project engineer has worked some hours for the project. You now need to confirm the time for the first two operations. For the following posting you will use CATS later in the next exercise. You will use a collective confirmation for the first posting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the first two operations using the following data: Field

Value

Network

Your network number

Operation

10 and 20


8


20

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Collective Confirmation . Alternatively, use transaction code CN27. b) On the Initial screen of Network following data:

Confirmation Collective Confirmation

Field

Value


8


20

, enter the

c) In the upper section enter your network number. d) Press Enter. e) In the lower section enter now the following data:

456

Field

Value

Activity

10

Activity

20




f) Press Enter. g) Save the confirmation. h) Confirm any warnings or errors while saving.


457



458




Unit 11 Exercise 72 Post Time Confirmation with CATS

Business Example As an alternative for the confirmation of time you want to use CATS for the time recording. As you have assigned an employee number to your network you will check the possibilities via CATS. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the times for activity 30 and 40 with reference to your employee number. Use the following data: Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number

Your employee number

Activity 30

Copy in the Data Entry Area

Activity 40


For Activity 30

5 hours each day of the week

For Activity 40

3 Hours each day of the week

2. Transfer the time recording data to the Project System. Use the following information: Field

Value

Personnel Number


Posting Date

Today

Test Run

Delimit


459



Unit 11 Solution 72 Post Time Confirmation with CATS

Business Example As an alternative for the confirmation of time you want to use CATS for the time recording. As you have assigned an employee number to your network you will check the possibilities via CATS. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Post the times for activity 30 and 40 with reference to your employee number. Use the following data: Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number


Activity 30


Activity 40


For Activity 30


For Activity 40


a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Time Sheet → CATS Classic → Record Working Times (CAT2) . b) On the Initial screen of

Time Sheet enter the following data:

Field

Value

Data Entry Profile

ZTS410

Personnel Number


c) Choose the Enter Time icon (F5). d) In the Work List section, select icon (F5).

Activity 30 and Activity 40 and choose the

Copy Row

e) In the Data Entry Area for each activity, enter the following data:

460




Field

Value

For Activity 30


For Activity 40


f) Press Enter. g) Choose the Release View icon. h) Select the two activities and choose the

Release icon.

i) Save the data. j) Confirm any messages with Enter. 2. Transfer the time recording data to the Project System. Use the following information: Field

Value

Personnel Number


Posting Date

Today

Test Run

Delimit

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Project System → Progress → Confirmation → Time Sheet → Transfer → Project System → Transfer (CAT5) . b) On the Initial screen of table.

CATS Transfer to Project System

, enter the data provided in the

c) Choose Execute (F8).


461




462

●


●

Execute a project

●





Unit 11 Lesson 5 Executing a Project



Posting Materials for a Project LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



463



Unit 11 Lesson 6 Evaluating Projects



●


Project Structure Evaluation Project Costs Evaluation LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:

464

●


●





Unit 11 Lesson 7 Processing Period-End Closing Activities



Period-End Closing Activities Settlement of a Project LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



465



466




UNIT 12

SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

Lesson 1 Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM

469

Lesson 2 Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

470

Exercise 73: Display a Functional Location Structure

471

Exercise 74: Create an Equipment Master Record

477

Exercise 75: Display an Asset Master Record

481

Lesson 3 Creating Notifications

487

Exercise 76: Create a Notification

489

Lesson 4 Processing Maintenance Orders

493

Exercise 77: Create a Maintenance Order

495

Exercise 78: Plan a Maintenance Order

499

Exercise 79: Release a Maintenance Order

505

Lesson 5 Executing Maintenance Orders

509

Exercise 80: Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

511

Exercise 81: Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

515

Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities

519

Exercise 82: Perform Period-End Closing Activities

521

UNIT OBJECTIVES ●

Process business steps in SAP EAM

●

Describe functional locations


467


For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Unit 12: SAP Enterprise Asset Management (EAM)

468

●

Describe equipments

●

Describe integration with Asset Accounting (FI-AA)

●

Describe serial numbers

●

Describe other master data used in SAP EAM

●

Create notifications

●

Process maintenance orders

●

Execute maintenance orders

●





Unit 12 Lesson 1 Processing Business Steps in SAP EAM



Process Business Steps in EAM LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●



469



Unit 12 Lesson 2 Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM



●

Describe equipments

●


●


●


Functional Locations

470




Unit 12 Exercise 73 Display a Functional Location Structure

Business Example You want to create a functional location structure for your production plant B##. You need to check whether there is a functional location structure available (B00) that you can use as a copying template. Afterwards you adjust your structure and create a new functional location for the new machine that you bought for production. You need to create a new functional location for the Production line TS410-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Cost Center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create Cost Centers. Display a Functional Location Structure You want to see whether there is a functional location available in your production plant, that you can use as a template for your production plant. 1. Check the functional location structure

B00 ,

B00

You need to log on to the back-end system. 2. Use the functional location B00 as a template to create your own structure B##. Use GUIbased transactions for this exercise. Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

Functional Location

B00

New Functional Loc Structure

B##

For the new description, use

Bicycle Ltd. GR##.

Create a Functional Location After you created your structure of the Production plant, B##, you need to create a new functional location for the Production Line. 1. Create a new functional location, Use the following data:

B##-1010-0## for the Production Line

Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-020


TS410-## .

471



Field

Value

Struct. Indicator

STR01

Description

Production Line TS410-##

Cost Center

PROD## (Created in the earlier exercise, Create Cost Centers)

472




Unit 12 Solution 73 Display a Functional Location Structure

Business Example You want to create a functional location structure for your production plant B##. You need to check whether there is a functional location structure available (B00) that you can use as a copying template. Afterwards you adjust your structure and create a new functional location for the new machine that you bought for production. You need to create a new functional location for the Production line TS410-##. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise requires the Cost Center, PROD-##, created in the exercise, Create Cost Centers. Display a Functional Location Structure You want to see whether there is a functional location available in your production plant, that you can use as a template for your production plant. 1. Check the functional location structure

B00 ,

B00

You need to log on to the back-end system. a) On the SAP Easy Access Screen, choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations Display . Alternatively, use transaction code IH01. b) On the Initial screen of Functional Location Structure: Selection Location field, enter B00 Then Execute

→ Structural

, in the Functional

c) Choose Execute . d) In the structure list, choose the

Expand Whole button.

The functional location B00 is a structure of a production plant for bicycles. This can be used as a coping template for the next task. e) Go back to the Easy Access Screen 2. Use the functional location B00 as a template to create your own structure B##. Use GUIbased transactions for this exercise. Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

Functional Location

B00


473



Field

Value

New Functional Loc Structure

B##

For the new description, use

Bicycle Ltd. GR##.

a) Choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations → List editing Create . Alternatively, use transaction code IL04. b) On the Initial screen of

Create Functional List Entry


Use the following information to create the template: Field

Value

Structure Indicator

STR01

FunctLocCategory

M

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Copy Reference button. e) In the following Window, in the Functional Location Functional Loc Structure field, enter B##.

field, enter B00, and, in the New

f) Press Enter. g) Change the description for the GR##.

Highest Level Functional Location

to Bicycle Ltd.

h) Save your entries. Create a Functional Location After you created your structure of the Production plant, B##, you need to create a new functional location for the Production Line. 1. Create a new functional location, Use the following data:

B##-1010-0## for the Production Line

Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-020

Struct. Indicator

STR01

Description


Cost Center

PROD##

TS410-## .

(Created in the earlier exercise, Create Cost Centers) a) Choose Logisitics → Plant Maintenance → Management of technical objects → Functional Locations Create . Alternatively, use transaction code

474

IL01.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Describing Master Data Used in SAP EAM

b) On the Initial screen of

Create Functional Location


Field

Value

Functional Location

B##-1010-020

Struct. Indicator

STR01

c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Functional Location: Mater Data screen, in the Production Line TS410-## for the description.

General tab, enter

e) in the Organization tab, enter Cost Center PROD-##. f) Save the functional location.


475



Describe Equipments

476




Unit 12 Exercise 74 Create an Equipment Master Record

Business Example You have ordered a new machine for production. The machine has already arrived and you need to create an equipment master record for that. The new equipment will be included in the functional location for your Production Line TS410-##. Additionally there is an asset needed. You want to check the interface between EAM and FI asset accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Create an equipment master record for the new machine assign it in your production line TS410-##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Equipment Category

M

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

Acquisition date

Today

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100

Maintenance Work Center

MECH-00

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

2. Review the Equipment master record. For the Equipment, use your Equipment number. Record the asset number. Asset number: _______________________________________________________________


477



Unit 12 Solution 74 Create an Equipment Master Record

Business Example You have ordered a new machine for production. The machine has already arrived and you need to create an equipment master record for that. The new equipment will be included in the functional location for your Production Line TS410-##. Additionally there is an asset needed. You want to check the interface between EAM and FI asset accounting. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you 1. Create an equipment master record for the new machine assign it in your production line TS410-##. Use the following data: Field

Value

Equipment Category

M

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

Acquisition date

Today

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100


MECH-00

Functional Location

B##-1010-0##

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Management of Technical Objects → Equipment → Create . Alternatively, use transaction code IE01. b) On the Initial screen of M.

Create Equipment: Order

, in the Equipment Category

field, enter

c) Press Enter.

478




d) On the General Data tab, enter the following information: Field

Value

Description


Object Type

2000

Acquisition value

100000,-- €

e) Choose the Location tab and enter the following information: : Field

Value

Maintenance Plant

1010

Work Center

T-A##

f) Choose the Organization tab and enter the following information: Field

Value

Cost Center

PROD##

Planer Group

100


MECH-00

g) Choose the Structure tab. h) Choose the Change InstLoc icon. i) In the following window, in the

Functional Location

field, enter B##-1010-0##.

j) Press Enter. k) Save the equipment. 2. Review the Equipment master record. For the Equipment, use your Equipment number. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Management of Technical Objects → Equipment → Display . Alternatively, use transaction code IE03. b) On the Initial screen of Equipment number.

Display Equipment: Order

, in the Equipment field, enter your

c) Press Enter. d) On the Organization tab, identify the asset number and write it down. Note that the Asset number varies, depending on the creation. e) Go back to the SAP Easy Access screen. Record the asset number. Asset number: _______________________________________________________________


479



Describe the Integration with FI-AA

480




Unit 12 Exercise 75 Display an Asset Master Record

Business Example After you created the equipment you want to check whether the asset has been created. You will have a look at the asset master record as well as to the asset explorer. As you have not bought the asset via a purchase order you need to do the FI posting for the asset acquisition as well. You will use your vendor T-BP## for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check the asset master record and evaluate the asset from the perspective of the asset explorer. Use an SAP Fiori app and the following data: Field

Value

Asset

Your asset number from the Equipment

Company Code

1010

What Cost center has been assigned to the asset? Cost Center:__________________________________ 2. Post the asset acquisition from vendor. You bought the asset from the vendor T-BP## for the value of 100.000,-- € plus VAT tax of 19%. Use the Acquisition without order (AP integrated) app and the following data: Field

Value

Document date

Today

Asset


Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR

Vendor

T-BP##

Tax Code

V1

Total amount

119.000,--

Tax amount

19000,--

Asset

Your asset number


481



Field

Value

Amount

100000,-- €

Is the asset acquisition visible? What is the posted amount visible there? __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

482




Unit 12 Solution 75 Display an Asset Master Record

Business Example After you created the equipment you want to check whether the asset has been created. You will have a look at the asset master record as well as to the asset explorer. As you have not bought the asset via a purchase order you need to do the FI posting for the asset acquisition as well. You will use your vendor T-BP## for that. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Check the asset master record and evaluate the asset from the perspective of the asset explorer. Use an SAP Fiori app and the following data: Field

Value

Asset


Company Code

1010

a) On the Launchpad, choose the b) On the Initial screen of

Display Asset Master Record

Change Asset Master

tile.


c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Time-dependent down the cost center.

to see the Cost Center that has been assigned and write

e) Go back to the Launchpad. What Cost center has been assigned to the asset? Cost Center:__________________________________ 2. Post the asset acquisition from vendor. You bought the asset from the vendor T-BP## for the value of 100.000,-- € plus VAT tax of 19%. Use the Acquisition without order (AP integrated) app and the following data: Field

Value

Document date

Today

Asset


Company Code

1010

Currency

EUR


483



Field

Value

Vendor

T-BP##

Tax Code

V1

Total amount

119.000,--

Tax amount

19000,--

Asset

Your asset number

Amount

100000,-- €


Acquisition without order (AP integrated)

b) On the Initial screen of Acquisition from Purchase w. Vendor relevant data provided in the table.

tile.

, Header data, enter the

c) Press Enter. d) In the first line item, enter the data provided in the table for Tax Code .

Amount , Tax amount , and

e) In the next line item section, enter the following data provided in the table for Key, Account , and Transaction Type .

Posting

f) Press Enter. g) In the next line item, enter

100.000,-- € in the Amount field.

h) Press Enter. i) Choose the Display Document Overview

item and post the document.

j) Go back to the Launchpad. k) Choose the tile Asset number.

360°View of asset

tile and enter the

Company Code 1010 and your

The posted amount should be 100.000,-- €. l) Exit the asset explorer and go back to the Launchpad. Is the asset acquisition visible? What is the posted amount visible there? __________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

484




Serial Numbers Other Master Data used in EAM


485




486

●


●

Describe equipments

●


●


●





Unit 12 Lesson 3 Creating Notifications



Notification Process Notification Structure Notification Creation


487



488




Unit 12 Exercise 76 Create a Notification

Business Example Your new machine in the production line TS410-## is not working properly. You will create a notification for the maintenance department that they should check the machine and fix the problem if possible. You will create a maintenance request for your equipment to record the malfunction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a maintenance request for the equipment. Assign yourself as the user who reported the notification and set the priority to very high. Use the following data to create the maintenance request: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Description

Production line malfunction

Equipment

Your Equipment number

Planner group

T##

Responsible Work Center

MECH-##

Reported by

Your Username


489



Unit 12 Solution 76 Create a Notification

Business Example Your new machine in the production line TS410-## is not working properly. You will create a notification for the maintenance department that they should check the machine and fix the problem if possible. You will create a maintenance request for your equipment to record the malfunction. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a maintenance request for the equipment. Assign yourself as the user who reported the notification and set the priority to very high. Use the following data to create the maintenance request: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Description

Production line malfunction

Equipment

Your Equipment number

Planner group

T##

Responsible Work Center

MECH-##

Reported by

Your Username

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → → Notification → Create (general) . Alternatively, use the transaction code IW21. b) On the Initial screen of

Create PM Notification , enter M1 for Notification Type .

c) Press Enter. d) On the Create Pm Notification: Maintenance Request screen, in the enter Production line TS410-## malfunction. e) On the Reference Object

screen, in the

Description field,

Equipment field, enter your Equipment number.

f) In the section Responsibilities section, change the Planner group to T##, the responsible work center, Main Work Ctr to MECH-##, and enter your user in the Reported by field. g) In the Start / End section, enter the following data:

490



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Creating Notifications

Field

Value

Required start

Today / one hour later

Priority

Very high

h) Save the notification.


491




492





Unit 12 Lesson 4 Processing Maintenance Orders



Maintenance Order Process Maintenance Order Structure Maintenance Order Creation


493



494




Unit 12 Exercise 77 Create a Maintenance Order

Business Example You want to see all notifications created for maintenance for this course. You need a list to gain an overview about the entire workload for the maintenance department. You chose the notification list for this overview. From the list, you will create a maintenance order for your notification for the maintenance department to start with the repair. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain an overview about all the outstanding maintenance requests, process a notification list for the entire maintenance requests of this course. Select all notification from the training. Use the following data: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Created by

TS410-01 to TS410-30

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name

My notification List ##

User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

2. Create the maintenance order from the notification list to initiate the repair of the production line. From the notification list you create the maintenance order and use the following data: Field

Value

Notification

Your notification

Work Duration

20

What is the order number from the notification list? Order Number: ______________________________________________________________


495



Unit 12 Solution 77 Create a Maintenance Order

Business Example You want to see all notifications created for maintenance for this course. You need a list to gain an overview about the entire workload for the maintenance department. You chose the notification list for this overview. From the list, you will create a maintenance order for your notification for the maintenance department to start with the repair. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. To gain an overview about all the outstanding maintenance requests, process a notification list for the entire maintenance requests of this course. Select all notification from the training. Use the following data: Field

Value

Notification Type

M1

Created by

TS410-01 to TS410-30

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name


User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance → Processing → Notification → List editing → Change . Alternatively, use transaction code IW28. b) On the initial screen Change Notifications: Selection of Notifications , enter the data provided in the table for the Notification Type and Created by fields. c) Execute the list. d) Choose the Current Variant

icon.

e) In the Window that appears, on the right side, choose right side column and select it to the left side.

Set the entry Order

f) Choose the Save as icon. g) In the following window, enter the following data:

496



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Maintenance Orders

Field

Value

Layout

U_TS410-##

Name


User specific

Selected

Default

Selected

h) Press Enter. i) Press Enter again. The order number should be included in the display variant. j) Stay in the list for the next step. 2. Create the maintenance order from the notification list to initiate the repair of the production line. From the notification list you create the maintenance order and use the following data: Field

Value

Notification

Your notification

Work Duration

20

a) In the notification list, select your notification and choose the b) On the Initial screen of field, enter 20.

Create Maintenance Order: Central Header

Create Order button. in the Work Duration

c) Press Enter. d) Save the order. e) Write down the order number from the notification list. f) Return to the Easy Access screen. What is the order number from the notification list? Order Number: ______________________________________________________________


497



498




Unit 12 Exercise 78 Plan a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is created the maintenance planner needs to plan the order. You will need an external maintenance worker to assist in the repair. As well you will add some materials to your order. As the order is already created, you need to change the existing order and do the planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Change the maintenance order created before. You will need an external maintenance assistance from the company that delivered the production equipment, therefore, you will plan that external work in the order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number (From the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order)

Control Key

PM02

Operation Short text

External assistance

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010


499



Field

Value

Sloc

101A

2. Add a material that has been delivered when you received the production machine. The material is named T-STS410 Spare Part TS410. Assign the component to Operation 10 and add 1 PC to the order. Use the following information:

500

Field

Value

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010

Sloc

101A




Unit 12 Solution 78 Plan a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is created the maintenance planner needs to plan the order. You will need an external maintenance worker to assist in the repair. As well you will add some materials to your order. As the order is already created, you need to change the existing order and do the planning. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Change the maintenance order created before. You will need an external maintenance assistance from the company that delivered the production equipment, therefore, you will plan that external work in the order. Use the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number (From the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order)

Control Key

PM02

Operation Short text

External assistance

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010


501



Field

Value

Sloc

101A

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number

Logistics → Plant → Order → Change . Alternatively, use

Change Order , in the Order field, enter your Maintenance order

c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Operations tab and enter the values provided in the table for and Operation Short text .

Control Key

e) Press Enter. f) In the window, enter the following data: Field

Value

Operation Qty

10 H

Price

100,-- €

Material Group

P001

Purchasing Group

Z##

Purchasing Org

1010

Vendor

T-BP##

Requisitioner

Your name

g) Press Enter. h) Go back to the operation overview. 2. Add a material that has been delivered when you received the production machine. The material is named T-STS410 Spare Part TS410. Assign the component to Operation 10 and add 1 PC to the order. Use the following information:

502

Field

Value

Component

T-STS410

Req. Quantity

1 PC

Item Category

L

Plant

1010

Sloc

101A




a) Choose the Components

tab and enter the data provided in the table.

b) Press Enter. c) In the following window in the

Operation field, enter 10.

d) Save the order.


503



504




Unit 12 Exercise 79 Release a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is planned you need to release the order. You will review the order first and then release and print it. You will use change transaction to proceed. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Review the costs and the system status of your maintenance order. What is the total amount of costs?

What is the current status of the maintenance order?

What do these statuses mean?

2. To release the order, put the order in process to and print the maintenance order.


505



Unit 12 Solution 79 Release a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is planned you need to release the order. You will review the order first and then release and print it. You will use change transaction to proceed. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Review the costs and the system status of your maintenance order. a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number



c) Press Enter. d) Choose the Costs tab. Here you see the total amount of costs and the current status. e) To see the meaning of each status, Choose the Information icon behind the system status. What is the total amount of costs? The total amount of costs should be 2.300,-- € What is the current status of the maintenance order? The status should be: CRTD; MANC; PRC What do these statuses mean? CRTD means Created, means Pre Costed.

MANC means that Material availability not checked, and

PRC

2. To release the order, put the order in process to and print the maintenance order. a) Choose the Put in Process...

506

icon.




b) In the following dialog box, choose c) In the next dialog box, choose the

Print with online window . Print Preview icon.

d) Choose Back to skip through the individual documents. e) When back in the dialog box, choose

Cancel .

The System Status should have changed to

REL MACM PRC SETC.

f) Save the order.


507




508





Unit 12 Lesson 5 Executing Maintenance Orders



Maintenance Order Execution Confirmation of Times Materials Posting Technical Completion


509



510




Unit 12 Exercise 80 Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

Business Example Your maintenance department has fixed the machine. The technicians received the materials in advance from the warehouse as a handover without posting. The technicians now record the hours and post the goods issue to the maintenance order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Profile

ZTS410

Order

Your maintenance order

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A


511



Unit 12 Solution 80 Confirm Time for Maintenance Order and Goods Issue Posting

Business Example Your maintenance department has fixed the machine. The technicians received the materials in advance from the warehouse as a handover without posting. The technicians now record the hours and post the goods issue to the maintenance order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Confirm the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Profile

ZTS410

Order

Your maintenance order

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion confirmation → Entry → Overall Completion Confirmation . Alternatively, use transaction code IW42. b) On the Initial screen of Extras → Settings.

Overall Completion Confirmation

c) In the following dialog box, enter the profile

512

, from the menu, choose

ZTS410 and choose Save..



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Executing Maintenance Orders

d) On the Initial screen of Overall Completion Confirmation number and press Enter.

, enter your Production order

e) In the Operation Overview , delete the Operation number 20. f) In Operation number 10 enter the following data: Field

Value

Operation

10

Act. Work

25 H

Work Center

MECH-##

Final Confirmation

Selected

Atyp

1410

g) Choose the Operation Data icon. h) In the Goods Movements for operation 0010

section, enter the following data:

Field

Value

Material

T-STS410

Qty

1

Plant

1010

SLoc

101A

i) Save the confirmation.


513



514




Unit 12 Exercise 81 Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is confirmed the order needs to be technically completed. With the technical completion, the outstanding Purchase requisition will be deleted as well. The work from the external technician is not needed. In addition to the order, the assigned notification will also be closed. You will technically complete both objects and review the order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Check the status of the purchase requisition that you created from the order. Use the Production order number from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order Is the purchase requisition still open?

Are there actual costs on the order?

2. Set the status of the maintenance order to

Technical completion

and close the order..

What is the status of the Purchase Requisition now?

What is the system status of the notification?


515



Unit 12 Solution 81 Technically Complete a Maintenance Order

Business Example Now that the maintenance order is confirmed the order needs to be technically completed. With the technical completion, the outstanding Purchase requisition will be deleted as well. The work from the external technician is not needed. In addition to the order, the assigned notification will also be closed. You will technically complete both objects and review the order. Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. This exercise uses the Maintenance order number, from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order 1. Check the status of the purchase requisition that you created from the order. Use the Production order number from the exercise, Create a Maintenance Order a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Maintenance → Maintenance Processing transaction code IW32. b) On the Initial screen of number.



c) Press Enter. d) Go to Operations , choose Operation 20, and choose the

Actual Data icon.

e) To check whether the purchase requisition is still open, double-click the Purchase Requisition number. f) Go back to the Order Header. g) To check whether there are costs on the order, choose

Costs .

Is the purchase requisition still open? Yes the status of the Purchase requisition is still open. Are there actual costs on the order? There should be actual costs of 1.500,-- € on the order. 2. Set the status of the maintenance order to a) Choose the Complete Technically

516

Technical completion

and close the order..

icon.



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Executing Maintenance Orders

b) In the following window, check whether

Complete notifications

is marked.

c) Press Enter. d) Go back in the order and check whether the

Purchase Requisition

is changed.

e) Press Enter. f) Go to Operations , select Operation 20, and choose the

Actual Data icon again.

g) To check the status of the Purchase Requisition, double-click the Purchase requisition. h) To check the system status of the assigned notification, go back to the Order Header, and choose the Display icon next to the notification. i) Exit the notification and the order. j) When asked to save the data, confirm with

Yes .

k) Return to the SAP Easy Access screen. What is the status of the Purchase Requisition now? The Status of the Purchase Requisition is Deleted. What is the system status of the notification? The system status of the notification is Order assigned.


NOCA – Notification closed and ORAS -

517




518





Unit 12 Lesson 6 Processing Period-End Closing Activities



Period-End Closing Activities


519



520




Unit 12 Exercise 82 Perform Period-End Closing Activities

Business Example The maintenance order is technically completed. The outstanding purchase requisition is deleted and not needed. Due to period end, the order will be settled and completed from a business perspective. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number

Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Deselected

In the detailed list – Settled values, who is the receiver of the costs?

How have the labor costs been settled to the receiver?


521



Unit 12 Solution 82 Perform Period-End Closing Activities

Business Example The maintenance order is technically completed. The outstanding purchase requisition is deleted and not needed. Due to period end, the order will be settled and completed from a business perspective. Note that in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace ## with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Settle the maintenance order using the following data: Field

Value

Order

Your maintenance order number

Settlement period

Actual month

Fiscal year

Actual year

Test run

Deselected

a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenance Processing → Completion → Individual Processing → Settle . Alternatively, use transaction code KO88. b) On the Initial screen of

Actual settlement: Order


c) Choose Execute . d) To see how the labor costs have been settled, first choose Receiver to see the cost elements.

Sender and then choose

e) Exit the settlement and return to the SAP Easy Access screen. In the detailed list – Settled values, who is the receiver of the costs? The costs have been settled to the cost center PROD##. How have the labor costs been settled to the receiver? The labor costs have been settled to the receiver by a settlement cost element – secondary cost element 92112000.

522



For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] Lesson: Processing Period-End Closing Activities




523


4. TS410_1610_S4HANA_Certification.pdf

Recommend Documents